Download Samsung 151D Specifications
Transcript
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS e-STUDIO162/162D e-STUDIO151/151D File No. SME04003200 R04112171700-TTEC Ver00_2005-01 © 2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safely of the machine. Be sure to replace these parts with the replacement parts specified to maintain the safety and performance of the machine. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation • When transporting/installing the machine, be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The machine is quite heavy and weighs approximately 16.8 kg (37 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it. • Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110A, 115V or 127V/8A, 220V-240V or 240V/5A for its power source. • The machine must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. • Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. • Also provide proper ventilation as the machine emits a slight amount of ozone. • The socket-outlet shall be installed near the machine and shall be easily accessible. 2. Service of Machines • Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. • Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit and their periphery. • Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers and the high-voltage transformer. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. • Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. • Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. • When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. • Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. • Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. - Avoid direct exposure to the beam. - Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam. - Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. • Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. 3. Main Service Parts for Safety • The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4. Cautionary Labels • During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the machine. 5. Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials • Regarding the recovery and disposal of the machine, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. 6. When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places. 7. Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. 8. Precautions Against Static Electricity • The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the machine and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity. 00_COVER.fm 2 ページ 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午後4時1分 CAUTION This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina. The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system. 4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot. CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM. VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 770 – 795nm Pulse times : 10.24µsec Out put power : 0.15mW ± 0.01mW VARO ! AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING. VARNING ! OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. 00_COVER.fm 3 ページ 2004年12月16日 木曜日 午後1時45分 At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Even if the APC circuit fails in operation for some reason, the maximum output power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1 MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT which is still-less than the limit of CLASS-1 laser product. Caution This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE. VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1. LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 CONTENTS [1] GENERAL 1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 5. [2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPLC printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. 2. 3. 4. Supply list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toner cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Appearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Developer unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Software for e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 A. Before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 C. Setting up button manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 D. Connecting the machine to your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 A. USB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 B. Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 [6] COPY PROCESS 1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 3. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. General description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport (Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Initial state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-8 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Charger wire cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F. Charger wire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-3 8-3 8-3 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-7 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 D. Pressure plate holder attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Duplex motor section (Duplex model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Reverse roller section (Duplex model only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 [9] ADJUSTMENTS 1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. Features of copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E. Copy density adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Duplex adjustment (With optional RADF installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. ADF (RADF) scan position automatic adjustment (With optional ADF/RADF installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. RADF (ADF) mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment (With optional ADF/RADF installed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-3 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-8 [10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Descriptions of various test commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 [11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] USER PROGRAM 1. User programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Selecting a setting for a user program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-3 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 2. Circuit descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 A. Main PWB (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 B. DC power circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 [14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1. 2. 3. 4. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29 ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 [15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15-1 15-3 15-4 15-5 01_GENER.fm 1 ページ 2005年1月31日 月曜日 午後2時5分 [1] GENERAL 1. Major functions Configurations Item CPM / PPM Model A4 e-STUDIO162 16 e-STUDIO151 15 e-STUDIO162D 16 e-STUDIO151D 15 Color SB/ 2 GDI ADF R-ADF Scanner SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter FAX MB Tray printer (push) MB Opt Opt Opt ❍ ✕ ❍ ❍ ✕ ❍ Opt MB Opt Opt ❍ Opt ✕ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Opt DDM IEEE External USB RJ45 1284 NIC ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ (2.0) ❍ (2.0) ✕ Opt ✕ Opt Descriptions of items CPM: SB/MB: 2 tray: ADF: R-ADF: Color scanner: GDI printer: SPLC: E-SORT: Duplex: Shifter: FAX: Desktop Document Manager: IEEE1284: USB: RJ45: External NIC: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute) SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass Second cassette unit (MY-1026) Original feed unit (MR-2016) Duplex original feed unit (MR-3017) Color scanner function GDI printer function with USB SPLC printer function Electrical sort Auto duplex copy function Job separator function FAX function (GD-1190) Scanner utilities Interface port (parallel) Interface port (USB) Interface port (Network) GA-1170 Descriptions of table ❍: Standard provision ✕: No function or no option available Opt: Option (e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D) (MR-2016) (MR-3017) (MY-1026) 2. Note for servicing and handling When the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error (E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E100" is displayed on the panel display. <Countermeasure> Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power. When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB. When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D GENERAL 1 - 1 02_SPECI.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時10分 [2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic Specifications Item Type Copy system Segment (class) Copier dimensions Weight (Approximately) Desktop Dry, electrostatic Digital personal copier 20.4"(W) x 19.8"(D) x 11.7"(H) (518mm(W) x 503mm(D) x 296mm(H)) e-STUDIO162/151 Approx. 36.6lbs. (16.6kg) e-STUDIO162D/151D Approx. 37.1lbs. (16.8kg) 2. Operation specifications Section, item Paper feed Paper feed system section AB system Tray paper feed section Multi bypass paper feed section Inch system Tray paper feed section Multi bypass paper feed section Details Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Type Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Type Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Type Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Type Paper exit section Originals Optical section Scanning section Writing section Image forming Remark Exit way Capacity of output tray Original set Max. original size Original kinds Original size detection Scanning system CCD sensor Resolution Lighting lamp Type Voltage Power consumption Output data Writing system Laser unit Resolution Photoconductor type Life Charger Charging system Transfer system Separation system Developing Developing system Cleaning Cleaning system 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets) A4, B5, A5 56 - 80g/m2 (15 - 21 lbs.) 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of front paper guide available A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Post card) 52 - 128g/m2 (14 - 34.5 lbs.) 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, envelope, OHP, Label (Single copy) User adjustment of side paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 21 lbs. 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of front paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2 x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 14 - 34.5 lbs. 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of side paper guide available Face down 200 sheets Center Registration (left edge) A4 (8-1/2" x 14") sheet, book None 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp 600 dpi CCFL 560Vrms 2.8W R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser 600 dpi OPC (30ø) 25k Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge (+) DC scorotron system (-) DC scorotron system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1 02_SPECI.fm 2 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後3時37分 Section, item Fusing system Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Heater lamp Fusing section Electrical section Power source Power consumption Details type type type Voltage Power consumption Voltage Frequency Rated current Max. Average (during copying) Average (stand-by) Pre-heat mode Auto power shut-off mode Heat roller system Teflon roller Silicon rubber roller Halogen lamp 230V 800W Local voltage 50/60Hz 8A Less than 1000W 350 Wh/H *1) 86Wh/H *1) 25Wh/H *1) 8.8Wh/H *1) *1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage. 3. Copy performance Copy magnification Section, item Fixed magnification ratios Manual steps (text, photo) Copy speed AB system A4 (Landscape) AB system B5 (Landscape) Inch system 8-1/2" x 14" (Landscape) Inch system 8-1/2" x 11" (Landscape) Max. continuous copy quantity Void Warm-up time Power save mode reset time Paper jam recovery time Details 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement (AB system : 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%) (Inch system : 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%) Zooming OC: 25 - 400%, ADF/RADF ∗: 50 - 200% magnification ratios (376 steps in 1% increments) 5 steps First copy time Tray paper feed 9.6 sec. (Pre-heat mode: 25 sec. / Auto power-shut-off mode: 40 sec.) A4 or Letter/100%/Auto Exposure Copy speed (CPM) Same size 15 Enlargement 15 Reduction 15 Copy speed (CPM) Same size 15 Enlargement 15 Reduction 15 Copy speed (CPM) Same size 12 Enlargement 12 Reduction 12 Copy speed (CPM) Same size 16 Enlargement 16 Reduction 16 99 Void area leading edge 1 - 4mm Trailing edge 4mm or less, 6mm or less (Duplex copying/both image) Side void area 0.5mm or more (per side) 4.5mm or less (total of both sides) Image loss leading edge Same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4.0mm or less (ADF/R-ADF/Duplex) ∗ Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3.0mm or less (ADF/R-ADF/Duplex) ∗ Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8.0mm or less (ADF/R-ADF/Duplex) ∗ 0 sec. 0 sec. 0 sec. ∗ ADF/RADF: Optional Duplex: e-STUDIO162D/151D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2 02_SPECI.fm 3 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時10分 4. SPLC printer Print speed First print time Duplex ROPM CPU Memory Interface Network Emulation MIB support Resolution Supported OS WHQL support Application Max. 15ppm (A4 / with ROPM) / 16ppm (Letter / with ROPM) 9.6 sec. (without data transfer time) Yes (e-STUDIO162D/151D) Yes None Share the memory with E-SORT function IEEE1284 / USB 2.0 External NIC (Optional) SPLC (JBIG GDI) Yes (with GA-1170) 600dpi *1 Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP Yes *2 Status window *1: Engine Resolution *2: Running change 5. Scan function Type Scanning system Light source Resolution Originals Output data Scan range Scan speed Protocol Support file format Interface Scanner utility Scan key/lamp Duplex scan Supported OS Void area WHQL supported Flat Bed Color Scanner Document glass / ADF / RADF ∗ 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL) Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi) Sheet type / Book type R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit OC / RADF ∗: 8.5" (215.9mm) (L) x 14" (355.6mm) (W) Original position: Platen: Left center / ADF ∗: Right center OC / ADF ∗: Max. 2.88ms/line (Color/Gray scale), Max. 0.96 ms/line (B & W) TWAIN / WIA (Only XP) / STI RAW USB2.0 Button Manager / Desktop Document Manager Yes Yes (with RADF, TWAIN) Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP No (User settable by PC) Yes *1 *1: Running change ∗ ADF/RADF: Optional Duplex: e-STUDIO162D/151D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3 03_CONSU.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時36分 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply list A. Europe/SCA/SCNZ No. Item 1 Toner CA (Black) 2 Developer 3 Drum kit Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) Drum Drum fixing plate × 10 × 10 ×1 ×1 ×1 Life Product name 8K PS-ZT1200 × 10PLS Package 1 25K D-1200 1 25K OD-1200 10 Remark ∗ Life setup is based on A4 6%. Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French. Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Process UN 2. Environmental The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows: (1) Normal operating condition Temperature: 20°C to 25 Humidity: 65 ± 5%RH (2) Acceptable operating condition (4) Supply storage condition Humidity (RH) 90% Humidity (RH) 85% 60% 20% –5˚C 45˚C 3. Production control number (lot No.) identification 20% 10˚C 30˚C 35˚C <Toner cartridge> (3) Transportation condition Production month Production day Destination code ∗ Humidity (RH) 90% (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) 60% Production place End digit of year Version No. ∗: Destination code 15% –25˚C 30˚C 40˚C Classification A packed with machine EX Destination B packed with machine A Option Destination B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1 No. G H P Q 03_CONSU.fm 2 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後3時38分 <Developer> <Drum cartridge> The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production. Sub lot Production day Production month End digit of year Production place Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place 4. Toner cartridge replacement End digit of year Version No. 1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier. 2) Keep holding Toner lever, and 3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier. (JAPAN production) Ver.A 9 1 1 0001 X Production month (1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.) Serial number of month 2 Fixed to 1. Pack division (See table below) End digit of year Version No. Division Option Packed with machine No. 2 3 3 1 4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it from the copier Production control label attachment position Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag. Production control label attachment position(*1) ∗1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a China product. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. Appearance (With optional ADF/RADF installed) 22 Interface 20 ADF/RADF (Option) 9 10 21 11 1 2 13 5 6 7 3 4 12 14 8 1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 18 Document glass Paper tray Bypass tray paper guides Original guides Exit area Paper output tray extension Power cord Paper holder arm 2 5 8 11 14 17 20 Operation panel Side cover Bypass tray Document feeder cover Document cover Power switch USB connector 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Front cover Side cover open button Reversing tray (RADF only) Document feeder tray Paper output tray Handles Parallel connector 2. Internal (With optional ADF/RADF installed) Toner cartridge 6 2 3 4 5 1 1 4 Front cover Transfer charger 2 5 Side cover Charger cleaner 3 6 Fusing unit release lever Photoconductive drum e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1 15 16 17 18 19 04_EXTER.fm 2 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時41分 3. Operation panel (e-STUDIO151/151D (Europe)) 1 2 3 4 5 OK MENU Display 1,2,3, 1,2,3, SP. FUNC 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ZOOM READY TO COPY. 100% A4 15 16 17 18 19 0 20 21 (e-STUDIO162/162D) 1 2 3 4 5 Display READY TO COPY. 100% 8.5x11 18 6 7 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 16 17 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax mode indicators). 2 Numeric keys Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical settings. The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus. 5 Power save indicator This lights up when the power save function is activated. 7 Error indicator This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error occurs. 9 Tray location indicator Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper or is not closed. 11 [2-SIDED COPY ] key (e-STUDIO162D/151D) Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode. 4 3 19 0 6 8 Display This shows messages indicating the machine status and any problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting menus. [CLEAR] key ( ) Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to move back to the previous menu level. ADF/RADF indicator (Option) This lights up when an original is placed in the ADF/RADF. [TRAY SELECT] key ( ) Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying. 10 [MENU] key Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a user program or to display the total count. 12 [E-SORT/SP.FUN ] key Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin shift function. 14 [EXPOSURE ] key Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo mode. 13 [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [OK (ENTER)] key Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a function setting menu. Press the [OK (ENTER)] key to enter a selection. 16 [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator 15 [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] key The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible. Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ). To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] key The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, from auto power shut-off mode. press the [ZOOM (COPY RATIO)] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in increments of 1%. 17 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) 18 Shows the current copy ratio. This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state. 19 Shows the selected paper size. 20 Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric keys. 21 A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 4. Motors and solenoids (With optional ADF/RADF installed) 9 12 2 8 11 10 4 1 5 13 6 7 3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Part name Main motor Scanner motor Toner motor Cooling fan motor Resist roller solenoid Paper feed solenoid Multi paper feed solenoid ADF motor Duplex motor Original feed solenoid ADF paper feed solenoid ADF gate solenoid Shifter motor Control signal MM MRMT TM VFM RRS CPFS1 MPFS SPFM DMT SPUS SPFS SGS SFTM Function / Operation Drives the copier. Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit). Supplies toner. Ventilate the fuser section. Resist roller rotation control solenoid Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1 Multi manual pages feed solenoid Drives the single pass feeder Devices the duplex paper transport section (Duplex model only) Original pick up solenoid Original feed solenoid (RADF only) Controls the document reverse gate. (RADF only) Drives the shifter. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3 04_EXTER.fm 4 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時41分 5. Sensors and switches (With optional ADF/RADF installed) 1 2 7 8 3 4 9 5 6 No. Name 1 Scanner unit home position sensor 2 POD sensor 3 PPD2 sensor 4 Cassette detection switch 5 PPD1 sensor 6 Door switch 7 ADF sensor 8 9 SPPD sensor PD1 sensor Signal MHPS Type Photointerrupter Function Output Scanner unit home position detection "H" at home position POD PPD2 CED1 PPD1 DSW Photointerrupter Photointerrupter Micro-switch Photointerrupter Micro-switch SPID/ SD SW SPPD PD1 Photointerrupter Paper exit detection Paper transport detection 2 Cassette installation detection Paper transport detection 1 Door open/close detection (safety switch for 24V) Paper entry detection Cover open/close detection Paper transport detection Paper width detect Photointerrupter Micro-switch "H" at paper pass "L" at paper pass "H" at cassette insertion "L" at paper pass 1 or 0V of 24V at door open "L" at paper pass "L" at paper pass "H" at A4 size or less "L" at A4 size or more e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 6. PWB unit (With optional ADF/RADF and FAX installed) 5 2 1 10 8 6 9 4 7 3 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name Exposure lamp inverter PWB Main PWB (MCU) Operation PWB Power PWB CCD sensor PWB LSU motor PWB TCS PWB LSU PWB FAX-operation PWB Modem PWB Function Exposure lamp (CCFL) control Copier control Operation input/display AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control For image scanning For polygon motor drive (In the LSU) For toner sensor control For laser control (In the LSU) FAX operation input (GD-1190 option) FAX control (GD-1190 option) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 7. Cross sectional view (With optional RADF installed) 3 1 2 5 18 15 16 17 4 6 7 8 9 10 14 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Part name Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Pickup roller Separation roller PS roller Paper exit roller 13 12 11 Function and operation Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit(CCD). Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum. Roller for paper exit Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface. Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller) Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller) Forms images. Transfers images onto the drum. Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only) Tray for manual feed paper Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port. Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper. Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette. Picks up documents. (ADF/RADF) Separates documents to feed properly. (ADF/RADF) Feeds documents to the scanning section. (ADF/RADF) Discharges documents. (ADF/RADF) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6 05_UNPAC.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午前11時29分 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 2. Cautions on handling 1. Copier installation Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier. Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any object. Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not install your copier in areas that are: • damp, humid, or very dusty Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight. Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality. • exposed to direct sunlight • poorly ventilated Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result. Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge. • subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater. Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print quality. 3. Checking packed components and accessories Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included. The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. • Operation manual Power cord • Installation manual Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation. 8" (20cm) 4" (10cm) Software CD-ROM 8"(20cm) 4" (10cm) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1 Drum cartridge (installed in machine) e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 4. Unpacking Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack the machine and carry it to the installation location. 4) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove the two protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the strings upward one at a time. Protective pins CAUTION tape 6. Developer unit installation 5. Removing protective packing materials 1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and then open the ADF/RADF and remove the protective materials. Take out the bag containing the toner cartridge. 1) 4) 5) 6) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier. Remove the locking tape of the developer unit. Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit. Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier. 2 5 3 2) Release the scan head locking switch. Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow. 4 Lock 7) Remove the screw (1 pc). 8) Remove Upper developer unit. Unlock 3) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover while pressing the side cover open button. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer 10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX roller evenly. 7. Toner cartridge installation 1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with both hands and shake it several times horizontally. 2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion. 3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction. Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit. 11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw. 12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly. 4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier. 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the figure below. Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as shown with the arrow in the figure below. (Prevention of splash of developer) 6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction. 13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier. Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sure to insert carefully. 14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw. 15) Completion of Developer unit installation Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter may drop and Toner unit may drop. 7) Completion of Toner unit installation Close the front and side cabinets. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 8. Loading the paper tray Note: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has no wrinkles or curled edges. 1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. 2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on the pressure plate of the paper tray. 3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as shown below. Pressure plate lock 6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine. Note: • If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously in the tray. • When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is left in the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb moisture from the air, resulting in paper jams. 9. Power to copier 1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position. Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the rear of the copier. 2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. 10. Software for e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software: 4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the front guide to match the width of the paper, and move the left guide to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray. Left guide Front guide • The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob on the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper to be loaded. • The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then insert it at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded. 5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the edges go under the corner hooks. Note: • Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ). Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed. • If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur. • Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When adding paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a single stack with the new paper. • Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and type. • When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too narrow and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will cause the paper to skew or misfeed. MFP driver Printer driver The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine. The printer driver includes the Print Status Window*. This is a utility that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages. * When the machine is connected through the parallel port, the Print Status Window can only be used when the parallel port is set to ECP mode. To set the parallel port mode, refer to your computer manual or ask the manufacturer of your computer. Scanner driver (USB only) The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications. Desktop Document Manager Desktop Document Manager is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications. Button Manager Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine to scan a document. Note: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are running Windows 98/Me/2000/XP and are connected to the machine by a USB cable. If you are running Windows 95/NT 4.0 or are connected to the machine by a parallel connection, only the printer function can be used. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 A. Before Installation B. Installing the software (1) Hardware and software requirements Note: • If you need to use a different connection method after installing the software based on a USB or parallel connection, you must first uninstall the software and then install it using the new connection method. • In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation. • The scanner feature only works when using a USB cable. • If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem. Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to install the software. Computer type Operating system*3 *4 Display Hard disk free space Other hardware requirements IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB2.0*1/1.1*2 or bi-directional parallel interface (IEEE1284) Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (ServicePack 5 or later)*5, Windows 2000 Professional*5, Windows XP Professional*5, Windows XP Home Edition*5 800 x 600 dots (SVGA) display with 256 colors (or better) 150MB or more An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate *1 The machine's USB connector will transfer data at the speed specified by the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is preinstalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows 2000 Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "Windows Update" is installed. *2 Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port. *3 Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode. *4 The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment. *5 Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer. (2) Installation environment and usable software The following table shows the drivers and software that can be installed for each version of Windows and interface connection method. Cable USB*1 Operating system MFP Driver Printer Scanner driver driver Windows 98/ Me/2000/XP Available Parallel Windows 95/ *2 98/Me/NT 4.0/ 2000/XP Desktop Button Document Manager Manager Available Not Available*3 *1 Windows 98/Me does not support USB 2.0. A USB 2.0 connection can be used in Windows 98/Me, however, the performance will be the same as USB 1.1. The print speed based on USB 2.0 specifications can only be attained if your computer is running Windows 2000/XP, you are using a cable that supports USB 2.0 (USB 1.1 or USB 2.0 certified), and the cable is connected to a USB 2.0 port on your computer. If the connection is made through a hub, the hub must support USB 2.0. *2 The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type of connection between the machine and your computer. *3 Although it is possible to install Button Manager and Desktop Document Manager on Windows 98/Me/2000/XP, neither Button Manager nor the scanner function of Desktop Document Manager can actually be used. [Standard installation (USB only)] The procedure for a standard installation of the software is explained below. If the machine is connected by a USB cable, it is recommended that you use the standard installation. Note: The standard installation can only be used when the machine is connected by a USB cable. If the machine is connected by a parallel cable, use the custom installation procedure. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 9). 2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. 4) Double-click the "setup" icon. Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double click the "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use and click the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language is selected automatically.) 5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand the contents of the software license, and then click the "Yes" button. 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next" button. 7) Click the "Standard" button. "Integrated Installer is preparing..." will appear and then installation of the MFP driver, Button Manager, and Desktop Document Manager will begin automatically. Follow the on-screen instructions. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 8) When the "Finish" screen appears, click the "Close" button. A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 9) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB cable. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear. Caution: If the following message appears on your computer screen, close it. A window regarding "HI-SPEED USB Device" will then appear. Close the window. This message appears when the machine's USB 2.0 mode is not set to "HI-SPEED". For information on switching the USB 2.0 mode. 10) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the MFP driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". Note: A "USB 2.0 Composite Device" installation window may appear prior to this procedure. In this case, follow the instructions in the window to install the USB 2.0 Composite Device. This completes the installation of the MFP driver. • If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER". 7) Click the "Custom" button. 8) Click the "MFP Driver" button. To view detailed information on the software, click the "Display Readme" button. [Custom installation] The procedure for a custom installation of the software is explained below. Use the custom installation procedure when the machine is connected by a parallel cable, when the machine is used as a shared printer on a network, or when you wish to install the MFP driver, Button Manager, or Desktop Document Manager separately. (1) Windows XP (USB/Parallel) 1) The USB/parallel cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 14). 2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. 4) Double-click the "setup" icon. Note: If the language selection screen appears after you double click the "setup" icon, select the language that you wish to use and click the "Next" button. (Normally the correct language is selected automatically.) 5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand the contents of the software license, and then click the "Yes" button. 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next" button. 9) The "Welcome" window will appear. Click the "Next" button. 10) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. If you are using the machine as a shared printer on a network, select "Connected via the network". For more information on this setting, see "Using the machine as a shared printer". Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway". e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6 e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 11) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Desktop Document Manager, click the "Utility Software" button. If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button and go to step 14). Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. Installing the Utility Software 12) Click the "Button Manager" button. To view detailed information on the software, click the "Display Readme" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. If you wish to install Desktop Document Manager, click the "Desktop Document Manager" button in this window and follow the onscreen instructions. Caution: • Button Manager can only be used when the machine is connected by a USB cable. • The scanner function of Desktop Document Manager can only be used when the machine is connected by a USB cable. 14) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB/parallel cable. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear. Caution: If the following message appears on your computer screen, close it. A window regarding "HI-SPEED USB Device" will then appear. Close the window. This message appears when the machine's USB 2.0 mode is not set to "HI-SPEED". For information on switching the USB 2.0 mode. 15) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the MFP driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway". Note: A "USB 2.0 Composite Device" installation window may appear prior to this procedure. In this case, follow the instructions in the window to install the USB 2.0 Composite Device. This completes the installation of the MFP driver. • If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. Setting up button manager". (2) Windows 98/Me/2000 (USB) Caution: If the following screen appears during installation of Desktop Document Manager, click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Desktop Document Manager installation. If "Skip" is selected, the Desktop Document Manager installation will continue without installing Desktop Document Manager imaging. If "Continue" is selected, Desktop Document Manager Imaging will be installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Desktop Document Manager Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows. 13) When installation of Button Manager is finished, you will return to the window of step 12). Click the "Close" button. A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 8). 2) Perform steps 2) through 7) in "Custom installation". 3) Click the "MFP Driver" button. To view detailed information on the software, click the "Display Readme" button. 4) The "Welcome" window will appear. Click the "Next" button. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7 e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 5) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. (3) Windows 95/98/Me/NT 4.0/2000 (Parallel) 1) The parallel cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 10). 2) Perform steps 2) through 7) in "Custom installation". 3) Click the "MFP Driver" button. To view detailed information on the software, click the "Display Readme" button. Note: In Windows 95/NT4.0, the "Utility Software" button does not appear and only the printer driver can be installed. 6) When the interface selection screen appears, select "USB" and click the "Next" button. If you are using the machine as a shared printer on a network, select "Connected via the network". For more information on this setting, see "Using the machine as a shared printer". Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000 and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Yes". 7) You will return to the window of step 3). If you wish to install Button Manager or Desktop Document Manager, click the "Utility Software" button. To install the Utility Software, see "Installing the Utility Software" (steps 12) and 13) on page 7). If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button. A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 8) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB cable. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear. 9) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the MFP driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000 and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Yes". Note: A "USB 2.0 Composite Device" installation window may appear prior to this procedure. In this case, follow the instructions in the window to install the USB 2.0 Composite Device. This completes the installation of the MFP driver. • If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. Setting up button manager". 4) The "Welcome" window will appear. Click the "Next" button. 5) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. If you are using the machine as a shared printer on a network, select "Connected via the network". For more information on this setting, see "Using the machine as a shared printer". 6) When the interface selection screen appears, select "Parallel" and click the "Next" button. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8 e-STUDIO162_151.book 9 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 7) Select the printer port and whether the machine is to be used as the default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button. Select "LPT1" for the printer port. Note: • If "LPT1" does not appear, another printer or peripheral device is using LPT1. In this case continue the installation, and after the installation is finished, change the port setting so that the machine can use LPT1. • The "Add Network port" button is used when the machine is used as a shared printer. Do not click this button here. 8) When the model selection window appears, select model name of your machine and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000 and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Yes". 9) You will return to the window of step 3). If you wish to install Desktop Document Manager, click the "Utility Software" button. To install the Utility Software, see "Installing the Utility Software" (steps 12) and 13) on page 7). If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button. A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. 10) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the parallel cable. This completes the installation of the MFP driver. 2) Click the "MFP Driver" button. To view detailed information on the software, click the "Display Readme" button. 3) The "Welcome" window will appear. Click the "Next" button. 4) When you are asked how the printer is connected, select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button. 5) When you are asked to select the printer port to be used, click the "Add Network Port" button. (4) Using the machine as a shared printer If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to install the MFP driver in the client computer. Note: • To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the operation manual or help file of your operating system. "Print server" as explained here is a computer that is directly connected to the machine, and a "Client" is any other computer that is connected to the same network. • When the machine is used via a network connection, only the printer function can be used; the scanner function cannot be used. 1) Perform steps 2) through 7) in "Custom installation". e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9 e-STUDIO162_151.book 10 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button. Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network. 4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. 7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button. 8) When you are asked to select the model name, select the model that you are using and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 9) You will return to the window of step 2). Click the "Close" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. This completes the installation of the MFP driver. 5) Select "Start this program" and then select "TOSHIBA Button Manager E" from the pull-down menu. C. Setting up button manager Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable scanning from the machine. To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to scanner events. (1) Windows XP 1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras". 2) Click the "TOSHIBA e-STUDIOXXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the "File" menu. 3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 6) Click the "Apply" button. 7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select "Start this program", select "TOSHIBA Button Manager E" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings. (2) Windows 98/Me/2000 1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel". 2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon. Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options". 3) Select "TOSHIBA e-STUDIOXXXX" and click the "Properties" button. In Windows Me, right click "TOSHIBA e-STUDIOXXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu. 4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10 e-STUDIO162_151.book 11 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. D. Connecting the machine to your computer (1) Connecting a USB cable 6) Select "TOSHIBA Button Manager E" in "Send to this application". Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the other applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected. 7) Click the "Apply" button. 8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select "TOSHIBA Button Manager E" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings. Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer. A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer. Caution: • USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition preinstalled. • Do not connect the USB cable before installing the MFP driver. The USB cable should be connected during installation of the MFP driver. Note: • If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0. • The machine's USB connector will transfer data at the speed specified by the USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed) only if the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is preinstalled in the computer, or if the USB 2.0 driver for Windows 2000 Professional/XP that Microsoft provides through its "Windows Update" Web page is installed. • To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HISPEED". • Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP. • Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card. • Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer. However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed). 1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine. 2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port. (2) Connecting a parallel cable 1) Obtain an IEEE1284 shielded parallel interface cable. 2) Insert the cable into the parallel interface connector located on the rear of the unit, and fasten with clasps. 3) Insert the other end of the cable into the interface connector of your computer. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 11 e-STUDIO162_151.book 12 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 11. Interface A. USB Connector 4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200 Type-B connector Cable Shielded twisted pair cable (2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent) Pin configuration The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 2 Signal name +5V -DATA +DATA GND 1 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal name STB DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 ACKNLG BUSY PE (Paper End) SLTC AUTO LF (NC) GND (0 V) FG +5 V Pin No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Signal name GND (STB RET) GND (DATA1 RET) GND (DATA2 RET) GND (DATA3 RET) GND (DATA4 RET) GND (DATA5 RET) GND (DATA6 RET) GND (DATA7 RET) GND (DATA8 RET) GND (ACKNLG RET) GND (BUSY RET) GND (PE RET) INPRM FAULT (NC) (NC) +5 V SLTC IN 12. Moving Moving instructions 3 4 B. Parallel interface This printer uses a bi-directional parallel interface. Use the supplied interface cable. Connector 36-pin ACON RBE42-36K1153 female connector or equivalent connector Cable Shielded type bi-directional parallel interface For best results, use a printer interface cable which is IEEE1284 compliant. Pin configuration The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table. 18 1 36 19 When moving the unit, follow the procedure below. Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the TD cartridge in advance. 1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. 2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the TD cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order. To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove the TD cartridge. 3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. 4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been stored in the front of the paper tray. 5) Push the paper tray back into the unit. 6) Lock the scan head locking switch. Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must be locked to prevent shipping damage. 7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension, and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed during installation of the unit. 8) Pack the unit into the carton. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [6] COPY PROCESS An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor. (Structure of the OPC drum layers) OPC layer (20 microns thick) Pigment layer (0.2 to 0.3 microns thick) Aluminum drum 1. Functional diagram Main charger Laser beam Cleaning blade MG roller Drum Transfer unit Resist roller (Basic operation cycle) Semiconductor laser Focus correction lens Main high voltage unit Exposure Charge Saw tooth Toner Developing Drum Cleaning Developer Cleaning blade PS roller Waste toner box To face down tray Paper release Fusing Separation Transfer Heat roller Electrode Transfer charger Heater lamp Synchronization with drum Manual feed Cassette paper feed Transfer high voltage unit Print process Paper transport route e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D COPY PROCESS 6 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2. Outline of print process Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens) This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material. First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure. A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum surface. Step-1: Charge Step-2: Exposure * Latent image is formed on the drum. Step-3: Developing Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible image with toner. Step-4: Transfer The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred onto the print paper. Step-5: Cleaning Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. Step-6: Optical discharge Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semiconductor laser beam. 3. Actual print process Semiconductor laser Exposure (semiconductor laser) OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum drum Drum surface charge after the exposure Step-1: DC charge A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of the Scorotron charger. Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer. Non-image area About DC5.5KV ( 580V/ 400V) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D COPY PROCESS 6 - 2 Image area OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum layer e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Step-3: Developing (DC bias) Step-4: Transfer A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier. Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears on the drum surface. The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the backside of the print paper. :Carrier (Magnetized particle) :Toner (Charge negative by friction) (N) (S) Permanent magnet (provided in three locations) N S N About DC 5.2kV DC 400V 8V MG roller Step-5: Separation Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is connected to ground. Step-6: Cleaning Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller. Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D COPY PROCESS 6 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Start Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to the drum surface for the next page to be printed. When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges on the OPC layer. 1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor potential is switched from LOW to HIGH. 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum. Semiconductor laser Stop The reverse sequence takes place. Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence Function The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss. Charge by the Scorotron charger Function The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor. Basic function A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the corona current on the photoconductor. As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level. Basic function Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface. Process controlling Function The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum. To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger. Basic function Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit. 0 START STOP Print potential Toner attract potential Developing bias 2) 3) 1) Low 4) Drum potential High Time e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D COPY PROCESS 6 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Outline of operation The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration. (Basic configuration) (Option) Operation section FAX FAX modem Scanner section (Option) CCD Network Network Box FAX I/F USB Printer/ Scanner I/F MCU (Main control/image process section) PC USB or parallel Note: The scanner function is effective only by USB connection. Network is for print only. LSU (Laser unit) Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens Laser beam Paper exit Process section Fusing section Printer section Paper transport section Cassette paper feed section Manual paper feed section (Outline of copy operation) Printing Setting conditions 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images(toner images). 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge. 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray. 1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. Image scanning 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD. Photo signal/Electric signal conversion 3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU. Image process 4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data. Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion (Outline of printer operation) The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later. (Outline of scanner operation) The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PC according to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the operations with the operation panel. 5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data. (Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.) 6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2. Scanner section A. Scanner unit The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images. It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit. B. Optical system Two white lamps are used as the light source. Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on the document table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 5 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line CCD. The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scanning) The resolution is 600dpi. When copying, only the green component is used to print with the printer. The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by the service test command. (Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD) 1 8 9 10 8 9 6 MBVM26W25W260NLH/G 6.00E-01 Intensity of UV 5.00E-01 Lamp : MBVM26W25W260NLH/G Lamp current : 5mA Temp. : 25 degree 4.00E-01 7 2 3 3.00E-01 4 5 2.00E-01 (Optical unit) 1.00E-01 0.00E+00 0 200 400 Wave length (nm) 600 800 1 4 7 Table glass Mirror 1 CCD PWB 2 5 8 Optical unit Mirror 2 Lamp 3 6 9 Lens Mirror 3 Reflector (Spectrum characteristics of the lamp) C. Drive system The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft. The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the idle pulley to drive the optical unit. 1 7 3 1 4 7 4 Scanner motor Belt 473 Shaft 6 2 2 5 8 Pulley gear Belt 190 Idle gear 8 5 3 6 9 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2 Idle pulley Optical unit 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 3. Laser unit B. Laser beam path The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams. A. Basic structure The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system. The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc. The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement of the laser writing start point. 4 3 2 1 C. Composition 6 No 1 2 3 Component Semiconductor laser Collimator lens CY lens 4 Polygon mirror, polygon motor 5 BD (Mirror, lens, PWB) fθ lens 6 Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.) Resolution: 600dpi Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub scanning direction Image surface power: 0.15 ±0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 - 795nm) Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 31,180rpm No. of mirror surfaces: 4 surfaces 5 Function Generates laser beams. Converges laser beams in parallel. Converges laser beams onto the polygon mirror surface. Reflects laser beams at a constant rpm. (A four-surfaces polygon mirror is used.) Detects start timing of laser scanning. 4. Fuser section Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum. Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.) Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. a≠b≠c a b d=e=f c d e f f θ LENS e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 A. General description General block diagram (cross section) Thermal fuse Separator pawl PPD2 Thermistor Pressure roller 2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165 190°C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set to 100°C. 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window. a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240°C. b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100°C during the copy cycle. c. Open thermistor d. Open thermal fuse e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190°C within 27 second after supplying the power. (4) Fusing resistor Fusing resistor Heat roller This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to improve transfer efficiency. Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush. Paper guide Top view Heat roller Thermal fuse Thermistor Heater lamp 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section A. Paper transport path and general operations 4 3 5 Separator pawl 2 1 (1) Heat roller A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and paper separation. 6 7 8 9 10 (2) Separator pawl Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl. 14 13 12 11 (3) Thermal control 1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the temperature in the fuser unit. To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes. Heated by the heater lamp. (800W) Safety device (thermal breaker, thermal fuse) Triac (in the power supply unit) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is sensed by the thermistor. 1 Scanner unit 8 Drum 2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit 3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller 4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray 5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller 6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit 7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets. The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet. The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed operation are given below. Level of the thermistor is controlled by the main PWB. With the signal from the main PWB, the triac is controlled on and off. (power supply PWB) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (1) Cassette paper feed operation 1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve. 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts rotating to drive each drive gear. The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore. PFS OFF 5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pickup roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feeding. PFS ON OFF 6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum curve and the separation section. PFS OFF OFF OFF RRS 3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment. This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper. PFS RRS RRS ON RRS OFF 8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detector) to the copy tray. 4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (2) Manual multi paper feed operation 1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below. C 3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating. A A OFF MPFS C ON MPFS 2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch. A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding. 4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the OPC drum. From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed operation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.) 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial state. C A A C ON MPFS OFF MPFS e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6 e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed a. When the power is turned on: PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on. b. Copy operation a PPD1 jam b PPD2 jam c POD jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller. POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller. POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2. 6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model) C. Back copy Document transport: A. Initial state Set duplex documents on the document tray. Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray cannot be selected.) B. Front copy By switchback operation, the document is sent through the PS roller to the exposure section, where the back of the document is exposed. • It is sent to the document exit section by the transport roller and the paper exit roller. • R-ADF gate solenoid ON. The document is sent to the intermediate tray, (but not discharged completely.) Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed roller to the PS roller. • The document is exposed in the exposure section, and sent to the document exit section • It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed. • by the transport/paper exit roller. • The document is discharged to the document exit tray. • R-ADF gate solenoid ON Paper transport: • The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (but not discharged completely.) Switchback operation is performed. • The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the duplex transport section, and the PS roller, and the images on the back are transferred. • The document is stopped once, then switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) Paper transport: • It is sent through the PS roller and the exposure section (without exposure operation) to the document exit section. • R-ADF gate solenoid OFF • It is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit tray. The document is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller by the paper feed roller and the images on the front surface are transferred. • The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side, (but not discharged completely.) • It is stopped once and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7 e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 7. Shifter Shift width: 2.5cm The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program. According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job. (Default: ON) Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to discharge documents according to the setting. Set document Documents after discharge, 1 4 3 with empty feed without empty feed 2 3 4 3 2 1 4 1 2 There are following job modes as well as D-D mode. S - S (Simplex to Simplex) S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Rotation copy mode (The back images are rotated 180°C.) S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation D - S (Duplex to Simplex) Rotation copy mode: The front and the back are in upside down each other. Copy mode without rotation: The front and the back are not in upside down. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. (Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed. Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety. 1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful not to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be destroyed.) 2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immediately after turning off the power.) The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the following sections: 1. High voltage section 2. Operation panel section 3. Optical section 4. Fusing section 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6. Manual paper feed section 7. Rear frame section 8. Power section 9. Duplex motor section 10. Reverse roller section 1. High voltage section A. List LO C K (2) (3) 3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. • If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and later. • If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12). 4) Remove the main charger. (Cleaning the screen grid and the sawteeth.) No. Part name Ref. 1 Drum 2 Transfer charger unit 3 Charger wire B. Drum replacement 1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 5) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. 6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. 7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. 8) Attach the cleaning blade. Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unit and fix it with a screw. Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand. When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the arrow direction and attach. Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Do not press the sub blade with the mocket. 10) Attach the main charger. Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame. Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove in the process frame. When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make contact with the cleaning blade. 11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2) 9) Attach the felt. ∗: Check while pressing the blade. Cleaning blade Moquette R ∗ 0 – 0.3 mm 0.2 – 0.5 mm Moquette F Sub blade 0 – 0.5 mm 0.2 – 0.5 mm ∗ 0 – 0.3 mm 0 – 0.5 mm Cleaning blade Moquette R Moquette F Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge breakage) Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown. Sub blade Be careful not to allow the moquette to cover the sub blade. Example of NG e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 12) Attach the detection gear. Note: • The detection gear is not installed to the drum cartridge packed with the main body. Add a new one. 2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove the transfer charger. Lock pawl rear 1) 13) Attach the drum cover. Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy. When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to the process frame. 2) C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) 1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover. Transfer charger 1) Lock pawl rear D. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 1) 2) E. Charger wire cleaning 1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit. 1) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure below. A. List No. Part name Ref. 1 Operation panel unit 2 Operation PWB 4) 3) 2. Operation panel section B. Disassembly procedure 1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover. 2) 1) 1) 2) 2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel unit. F. Charger wire replacement 1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw. 2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire. 3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2). At that time, be careful of the following items. • The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1 • The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in the range of the projection section. • Be careful not to twist the charger wire. 1) 1) 3) 3) 1) 2) Charger wire 1) 1) 2) 1) 1mm Protrusion 1.5mm Fig.1 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2) Remove the four screws, remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector. 3) Remove the right cabinet. 4) Remove the left cabinet. 5) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover. 6) Remove the table glass. 3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet. 4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB. 1) 2) 1) 3) 6) 1) 7) 1) 3) 4) 5) 8) 1) 1) 4) 3) 1) 2) 1) Note that there are 9 pawls 7) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. 8) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate. 9) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the tension, and remove the belt. C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure 3. Optical section 3) A. List NO. Part name Ref. 1 Copy lamp unit 2 Copy lamp 3 Lens unit 2) 4) B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover. 1) 1) 1) 2) 2) 1) 1) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5 08_DISSASEMBLY.fm 6 ページ 2004年12月23日 木曜日 午後1時8分 10) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper. 11) Remove the rod. 3) C. Assembly procedure CCD core 1) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness. 2) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB connector of the carriage unit. 3) Move the core which was passed through the CCD-MCU harness near the CCD PWB connector as shown in the figure below, and fix it with a filament tape (19mm wide, 40mm long). For the attachment reference, refer to the figure below. Clean and remove oil from the attachment section. 4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back of the carriage unit. 5) Attach the PWB holder to the position specified in the figure below. 6) Pass the core through the FFC and the PWB holder, and fix the core. 2) 1) Note: Attach the FCC to the base plate securely with duplex tape to prevent against coming loose. Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame. 12) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage. 4) 1) 2) 3) Note: Attach the FCC to fit with the marking line. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6 Marking line. e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 4. Fusing section 4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide. A. List No. 1 2 3 4 5 1) Part name Ref. Thermistor PPD2 sensor Heater lamp Pressure roller Heat roller 2) B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet. 2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit. Pressure roller section disassembly 5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the right side, and open the heat roller section. 2) 3) 4) 1) 6) 5) 1) 3) 2) 5) 6) 6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor. 2) 1) 3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor. 1) 2) PPD2 sensor 2) Thermistor 3) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7 e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp. 10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides. 1) 1) 1) 2) 11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (*). Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ Heater lamp Pressure roller 8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.). 1) 3) 3) 2) 1) 2) 2) 3) Heat roller disassembly (Continued from procedure (4).) 5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller section. 1) 3) 9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate. 3) 2) 1) 1) 2) 2) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8 3) e-STUDIO162_151.book 9 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat roller. 5. Tray paper feed/transport section A. List 1) 2) 3) No. 1 2 3 4 5 Heat roller Part name Ref. Paper holding arm PPD1 sensor PWB LSU unit Intermediate frame unit Paper feed roller B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove the paper holding arm. Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holder from the arm. 1) 7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ∗1. Grease: “JFE552” UKOG-0235FCZZ 2) 2) 1 1 3) 2) 3) 2 4) 1) Apply grease "GU-2" (UKOG-0255FCZZ) to the fusing gear surface ∗2. 8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit. 2) Remove the two screws, and remove the hinge guide R. 3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 positions) 4) Remove the six screws, and remove the scanner unit. 1) 5) 5) 6) 3) 5) 5) 5) 1) 2) 2) 4) 3) 4) 1) 5) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9 08_DISSASEMBLY.fm 10 ページ 2004年12月23日 木曜日 午後1時44分 5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB. 6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor PWB. 9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob. 10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing. 3) 2) 3) 1) 4) 2) 11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, and the bearing. 1) 2) 1) 7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide. 1) 1) 2) 12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker unit. (When the GD-1190 is installed) 3) 8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt. 2) 2) 1) 1) Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame for the speaker. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10 08_DISSASEMBLY.fm 11 ページ 2004年12月23日 木曜日 午後1時8分 13) Remove the flat cable and the grounding wire. 14) Remove the four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the GD-1190 is installed) 18) Remove the three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the belt. 2) 3) 3) 1) 1) 3) 2) 1) 19) Remove the harness guide. 4) 3) 3) Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame the interface. 15) Disconnect the connectors. 16) Remove the three screws, and remove the MCU PWB. 1) 3) 2) 20) Remove the five screws and the grounding wire, and remove the main drive unit. 2) 2) 2) 1) 1) Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the inner side of the interface metal frame . 1) 1) 17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor. 1) 1) 2) 1) CAUTION:Attach the gears securely e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11 e-STUDIO162_151.book 12 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid. 23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. 24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate frame unit to remove. 3) 3) 3) 3) 3) 4) 4) 2) 1) 2) 1) 4) 2) 2) 3) 1) 25) Remove the four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit. [Note for installation] Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked. 22) Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray. 3) c b 1) 1) a 1) 1) 2) 1) 4) 2) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12 e-STUDIO162_151.book 13 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 31) Remove the four screws, and remove the LSU. 26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley. 27) Shift and remove the shifter unit. 1) 1) 1) 3) 2) 4) 2) 3) 1) 28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear. 29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the shifter roller. 1) Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach. 2) 3) 30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove the two screws, and remove the shifter motor. 1) 2) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13 e-STUDIO162_151.book 14 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit. 33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller unit. 36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit. Back 5) 5) Clutch unit 4) 4) Paper feed roller PS roller unit Use grease of Floil FG40H only to apply to this section. 4) 4) PS semi-circular PS semi-circuler earth plate earth plate 1) 3) 2) Front 1) 3) 34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide. 1) 2) 38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit. 39) Remove the semi-circular rubber. 2) 2) 35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sensor PWB. 1) 1) 1) 2) C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14 e-STUDIO162_151.book 15 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 6. Manual paper feed section A. List No. 1 2 3 4 3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper frame. 1) Part name Ref. Manual transport roller Cassette detection switch PPD1 sensor PWB Side door detection unit 1) B. Disassembly procedure Multi unit 1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover. 1) 2) 2) 4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from the multi paper feed upper frame. 2) 1) 2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit. 2) 2) 1) Back Wire treatment e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15 1) e-STUDIO162_151.book 16 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller B9. 7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid. 1) 1) 1) 1) 3) 2) Multi paper feed solenoid 3) 2) L O CK T O K 6) Remove the pick-up roller. C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. D. Pressure plate holder attachment 1) 1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not covered with the seal M1-N. Seal M1-N Pressure plate holder 2) Attachment reference Attachment reference e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16 e-STUDIO162_151.book 17 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 7. Rear frame section 7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust fan motor. Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan. Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside. A. List No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. FAX PWB (When the GD-1190 installed) Mirror motor Main motor Exhaust fan motor Main PWB 1) B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove the connector, the flat cable, and the grounding wire. 3) Remove three screws, and remove the FAX PWB. 3) 2) 1) Blowing direction 8) Disconnect the connectors. 9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB. 1) 2) 2) 2) 3) 1) 2) 2) 4) Disconnect the connector. 5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor. 2) 1) 3) 1) 3) 2) 2) 1) 2) 2) C. Assembly procedure 6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main motor. For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 3) 1) 2) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17 08_DISSASEMBLY.fm 18 ページ 2004年12月23日 木曜日 午後1時8分 8. Power section C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. A. List 10. Reverse roller section (Duplex model only) No. Part name Ref. 1 Power PWB A. List B. Disassembly procedure 1) Disconnect each connector. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. 3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit. No. Part name Ref. 1 Reverse roller B. Disassembly procedure 1) Remove four screws 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire 3) Remove the reverse unit. 4) 1) 1) 1) 1) 2) 1) 3) 2 5) 4) Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame for the power supply. C. Assembly procedure 3 For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 1 9. Duplex motor section (Duplex model only) 4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it. A. List No. Part name Ref. 1 Duplex motor B. Disassembly procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) Remove the rear cabinet. Remove two screws. Remove the Duplex motor cover. Remove the Duplex motor. 1 C. Assembly procedure For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. 1 3 1 2 Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gear with the belt on the main body side. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [9] ADJUSTMENTS 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio Copy image dimensions = X 100 (%) Original dimension 1. Optical section A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 48-01. (When a 100mm scale is used as the original.) Original (Scale) mm 1/2mm 10 20 HARDENED STAINLESS JAPAN 100 110 120 130 140 (1) Outline 150 Shizuoka The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made manually. The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.) The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed. Paper feed direction mm 1/2mm HARDENED STAINLESS JAPAN 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150 Shizuoka Reference Comparison point Copy 110 (2) Main scanning/sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) 2) 3) 4) When the main PWB is replaced. When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. When "U2" trouble occurs. When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Necessary tools 6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key. Mode • Scale c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.) Display item F-R Default LED value 50 PRINT mode lamp Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp direction magnification ratio 8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the [START] key. 9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%. d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.) 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2) 3) 4) 5) 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. Measure the length of the copied scale image. Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio using the formula below. Copy image dimensions = X 100 (%) Original dimension Mode 110 Original (Scale) mm 1/2mm HARDDENCD STAINLESS JAPAN 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150 Shizuoka mm 1/2mm 10 20 JAPAN 100 110 120 HARDDENCD STAINLESS 130 140 Paper feed direction 150 Display Default LED item TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TC Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp (2nd cassette paper 2nd cassette lamp feed) 50-10 Print center offset MFT 50 COPY mode lamp (Manual paper feed) Manual feed lamp 2nd print center SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp offset (Main cassette Main cassette lamp paper feed) The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. * In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting. (1) Lead edge adjustment Shizuoka Reference Comparison point 1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper or OC cover. Copy 6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. (100 ± 1.0%). If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [←/→] key. (SCAN mode lamp ON) 8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the [START] key. Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is changed by 0.1%. B. Image position adjustment The employed test commands and the contents are as follows: Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount Display Default LED item TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp TC MFT 50 DEN-A 50 COPY mode lamp Manual feed lamp 50-01 PRINT mode lamp RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp 2) Execute TC 50 - 01 3) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at 100%. 4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.) * The ADF adjustment is made by adjusting the ADF image scan start position after OC adjustment. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (Example) Document guide Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm Image loss, R = 4mm 5mm 10mm (2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment 1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper. 2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper feed) adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly positioned. The standard value is 0 ±2mm from the paper center. (Copy A) 2.0mm or less Copy image B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper A4 size rear edge Shift (Copy B) Copy paper folding line 2.0mm or less Copy image Shift Copy paper folding line (Paper feed direction) 2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amount adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge. Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm) Scale image 4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame. • For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures. • Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually. 2. Copy density adjustment Paper rear edge 4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. The default value is 50. (3) Center offset adjustment 1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide. • Test chart for the center position adjustment. Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper transport direction. A. Copy density adjustment timing The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases: • When maintenance is performed. • When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. • When the optical section is cleaned. • When a part in the optical section is replaced. • When the optical section is disassembled. • When the OPC drum is replaced. • When the main control PWB is replaced. • When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. • When the memory trouble (U2) occurs. B. Note for copy density adjustment 1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment • Clean the optical section. • Clean or replace the charger wire. • Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3 09_ADJUS.fm 4 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時39分 C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment (2) Perform the adjustment in each mode. • One of the following test charts: KODAK GRAY SCALE • B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper • The user program AE setting should be "3." 1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 4602. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.) (e-STUDIO151/151D (Europe)) Test chart comparison table KODAK GRAY SCALE 1 2 3 4 19 A TEXT (1) Exposure mode, level display | | | | | OK D. Features of copy density adjustment For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used. 1 1 2 2 2 1,2,3, 1,2,3, 2 1 1 AUTO ZOOM SP. FUNC (2) Mode select key List of the adjustment modes Auto Mode Manual Mode Photo Mode Manual T/S mode T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 1 step only E. Copy density adjustment procedure The copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi. Sub code Resolution for copy density adjustment 01 300dpi 46 02 600dpi For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key. (e-STUDIO162/162D) TEXT (1) Exposure mode, level display | | | | | (2) Mode select key Adjustment mode Display item LED Main code (1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting 1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover. White paper TOSHIBA gray chart adjustment level Auto mode AE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. Text mode TEXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. Photo mode PHOTO SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. Text T/S mode TSTXT PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. Auto T/S mode TSAE COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. 3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the exposure test chart (TOSHIBA Gray Scale). (When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity display. (When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display. * The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99. Test chart e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4 09_ADJUS.fm 5 ページ 2004年12月23日 木曜日 午後2時2分 3. High voltage adjustment 4. Duplex adjustment (With optional RADF installed) A. Main charger (Grid bias) Note: • Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or more measurement. • After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do not reverse the sequence. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) 4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580 ±12V. A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once stored in memory. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC mode)and stored in memory. This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data. In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted by changing the document read end position. (Adjustment procedure) 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper) VRG1 Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame for the power supply. 5 10 2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode. Scale (S-D mode) B. DV bias check Scale (D-S mode) Note: • A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must be use for correct check. • The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can be made. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and check that the output is –400±8V. VRDV 3) Execute test command 50-18. Display item OC Mode Default LED OC memory reverse 50 COPY mode lamp output position ADF memory reverse ADF 50 PRINT mode lamp output position Select the ADF memory reverse output position, and press [START] key to make a copy. Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0 mm in the R-ADF mode. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in image loss. Front edge of paper The front edge of the scale on test chart Caution: Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the circumference of the metal frame for the power supply. less than 4 mm e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5 Void area 5 10 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below. Document guide The trailing edge has a scale 2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side) B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) in duplex copying. In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part. There are two adjustment modes: 1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-ADF) 50-19 (SCAN mode lamp) The size (length) of a document read from the R-ADF is detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) 2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp) This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing. The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-ADF) is adjusted. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range; 1 – 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Display item DEN-B Default Paper rear edge void 50 amount Print start position (Duplex RRC-D 50 back surface) * The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2. Table glass 3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make the printing mode in OC-D mode. Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on the image. Void position to be check Paper The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area. (2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-ADF) 1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below. LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Scale (D-D mode) (Adjustment procedure) (1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) 2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp(on the operation panel) and make the printing mode in the D-D mode. 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette. Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during this adjustment. 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area. l Void position to be checked e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6 09_ADJUS.fm 7 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後3時39分 5. ADF (RADF) scan position automatic adjustment (With optional ADF/RADF installed) 6. RADF (ADF) mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment (With optional ADF/RADF installed) Place a black chart so that it covers the ADF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the OC cover. When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display. * Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm * If the values are kept as the default values, ADF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the ADF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The ADF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the OC mode adjustment in copying has been completed. 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a normal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make a test chart. Mode ADF scan position auto adjustment ADF scan position manual adjustment Display item AUTO MANU Default LED 1 COPY mode lamp 1 PRINT mode lamp Operation The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 ADF AUTO AUTO 100% ** <When ERR> OK 53-08 ADF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in paralled with the edge lines. 2) Set the test chart on the RADF and make a duplex copy (D-D or D-S) in the normal ratio (100%). 3) Compare the scale image and the actual image. If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures. 4) Execute TC 48-05. 5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section. To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [←/→] keys. 6) Enter the set value and press the start key. When adjusting the RADF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select single/duplex after entering the one page print mode, performing 2page single copy. Mode Display item SIDE1 Default Sub scan magnification ratio 50 adjustment on the surface of ADF/ RADF document Sub scan magnification ratio SIDE2 50 adjustment on the surface of RADF document * When there is no document in ADF, copy is inhibited. LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp <Adjustment specification> Adjustment mode Sub scanning direction magnification ratio (ADF/RADF mode) Spec value TC Set value At normal: ±1.0% 48-5 Add 1: 0.1% increase Reduce 1: 0.1% decrease 6cm or more is required. * Use a black chart or prepare a chart as shown below. Chart size: 300 x 100, prepared with cutting sheet No. 791 (Black) or an equivalent one. Reason: To prevent erroneous detection by disturbing light of a fluorescent lamp, etc. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7 Setting range 1 – 99 09_ADJUS.fm 8 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時45分 7. Automatic black level correction a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) 2) 3) 4) When the main PWB is replaced. When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. When "U2" trouble occurs. When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Adjustment procedure Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center. 10 Chart back surface When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD. * Default: 0 * If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. c. Operation 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 0 2) [OK (ENTER)/START] Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 8 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時47分 [10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 1. Entering the test command mode To enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as follows: [#] key → [*] key → [C] key → [*] key To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key. 2. Key rule [10KEY]: [←/→]: [OK (ENTER)/START]: [C]: [CA]: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Setup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Settlement <In case of test commands for print> [OK (ENTER)]: Settlement (Without print) [START]: Settlement/Print (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations. Exits from the test command mode. For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00). 3. List of test commands Main Sub Contents code code 1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display (MHP-SENSOR) 06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING) 2 01 Single Paper Feeder (ADF) aging (ADF AGING) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 02 ADF sensor status display (ADF SENSOR) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 03 ADF motor operation check (ADF MOTOR CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 06 RADF resist clutch operation check (RADF RES.CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 08 ADF paper feed solenoid operation check (ADF SPUS CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 09 RADF reverse solenoid operation check (RADF SPFS CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 10 RADF paper exit gate solenoid operation check (RADF SGS CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK) 5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK) 02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK) 03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK) 6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation check (PSOL CHK) 02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R SOL CHK) 7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/ AGING) 06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING) 08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE) Main Sub Contents code code 8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.) 02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) 03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) 06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.) 9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT.SPEED) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 10 00 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR) 14 00 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.) 16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.) 20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.) 21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE) 22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT) 02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET) 04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT) 05 Total counter display (TTL CNT) 06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT) 08 ADF counter display (ADF CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT) 14 ROM version display (ROM VER.) 16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT) 18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT) 19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT) 21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT) 22 ADF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Main Sub Contents code code 24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.) 04 ADF counter clear (ADF CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) 06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.) 07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.) 08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.) 09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.) 10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.) 14 ADF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.) 25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK) 10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK) 26 02 (R)ADF setting (ADF/RADF) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) 03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY) 04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 06 Destination setting (DESTINATION) 07 Machine conditions check (CPM) 20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE) 30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK) 37 Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END) 39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK) 40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF) 42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING) 43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID) 62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S) 30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR) 41 06 OC cover float detection level (OC FLOAT LEVEL) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) 43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP) 04 Fusing temperature setting in multi coy (FU TEMP MULTI) 05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP DPLX) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) 14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START) 46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) 12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300) 19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE) 20 ADF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL ADF) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600) 30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT) 31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS) Main Sub Contents code code 46 32 Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR) 39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 48 01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY MAG.) 05 ADF/RADF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (ADF/RADF MAG.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) 49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE) 50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE) 06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (ADF/RADF) (ADF/ RADF EDGE) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) 10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER) 12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFFCENTER) 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (DPLX REVERSE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON with OC or ADF set) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.) 53 08 ADF scan position automatic adjustment (ADF AUTO) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK) 63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK) 02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL) 64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.) 66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 03 FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 11 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 32 Receive data check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 33 Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Main Sub Contents code code 66 34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 38 Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 41 CI signal check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 4. Descriptions of various test commands Main code 1 Sub code 01 Contents Details of function/operation Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the “COPY mode lamp”. (When the mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.) During operation, the copy lamp lights up. When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 01-01 SCAN CHK - 100% + 2) [ZOOM] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 78% + 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display (MHP-SENSOR) 2) [←] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 99% + 3) [OK (ENTER)/START] 01-01 SCAN CHK EXECUTING... - 78% + 2) [→] 01-01 SCAN CHK - 101% + [Function] Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during the sensor ON status. [Operation] 1) Initial display 01-02 MHP-SENSOR EXECUTING... 06 2 01 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING) Single Paper Feeder (ADF) aging (ADF AGING) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again. ∗ When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the home position.) During aging, the copy lamp is ON. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01. [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and single-face document transport is performed in the case of ADF or duplex document transport in the case of RADF. However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ Main code 2 Sub code 02 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation ADF sensor status display (ADF SENSOR) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] The ON/OFF status of the ADF sensors can be checked with the LCD. When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD. Sensor Document set sensor ADF document transport sensor ADF paper feed cover open/close sensor Display item SPID SPPD SDSW [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-02 ADF SENSOR 03 06 ADF motor operation check (ADF MOTOR CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) RADF resist clutch operation check (RADF RES.CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) 2) When the sensor is ON: 02-02 ADF SENSOR SPID SPPD SDSW [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 1-01. [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the RADF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-06 RADF RES.CHK EXECUTING... 08 ADF paper feed solenoid operation check (ADF SPUS CHK) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] The ADF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-08 ADF SPUS CHK EXECUTING... 09 RADF reverse solenoid operation check (RADF SPFS CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] The ADF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-09 RADF SPFS CHK EXECUTING... 10 RADF paper exit gate solenoid operation check (RADF SGS CHK) (Enabled only when RADF is set.) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] The ADF paper exit gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-10 RADF SGS CHK EXECUTING... 3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK) [Function] The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations. [Operation] 1) Initial display 03-03 SHIFTER CHK EXECUTING... e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ Main code 5 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK) [Function] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all pixels ON). After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms) When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode. <Key input check mode> When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0. When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value. Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted. When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec. When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the machine goes into the sub code entry mode. When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the machine goes out from the test command mode. (Note in the key input check mode) • Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status) • Multi key input is ignored. [Operation] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> 1) Initial display ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ 2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode. <Key input check mode> 1) Initial display 2) [OK (ENTER)/START] 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 0 02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check (HT LAMP CHK) ** [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates. [Operation] 1) Initial display 05-02 HT LAMP CHK EXECUTING... 03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec. [Operation] 1) Initial display 05-03 C-LAMP CHK EXECUTING... e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ Main code 6 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) operation check (PSOL CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OF for 500ms 20times. When [←/→/10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched. Code number 0 1 2 Setting CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS Remark Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) [←/10KEY] 06-01 PSOL CHK 0:CPFS1 06-01 PSOL CHK 2:MPFS 2) [→/10KEY] 3) [OK (ENTER)/START] 06-01 PSOL CHK 1:CPFS2 06-01 PSOL CHK EXECUTING... 4) Returns to the initial display. 02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check (RES.R SOL CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times. [Operation] 1) Initial display 06-02 RES.R SOL CHK EXECUTING... 7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM (W-UP/ AGING) [Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed. When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up. After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec). To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hardware reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) After 10sec 07-01 W-UP/AGING 07-01 W-UP/AGING 0 06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING) 10 [Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated. To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes hardware reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display (Basic display of copy) READY TO COPY 100% A4 08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE) 0 [Function] Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed. When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped. However, warm-up is continued. After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test command 7-01.) [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) After 10sec 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 0 10 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6 e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ Main code 8 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec. When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-01 DVLP BIAS SET. EXECUTING... 02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-02 MHV(H) SET. EXECUTING... 03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-03 MHV(L) SET. EXECUTING... 06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 08-03 THV SET. EXECUTING... 9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-01 DPLX ROT. EXECUTING... 02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check (DPLX ROT.REV.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-02 DPLX ROT.REV. EXECUTING... 04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment (DPLX ROT.SPEED) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8) [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 8( 1-13) 2) [10KEY] 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7 3) [OK (ENTER)/START] 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ Main code 10 Sub code 00 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 10-00 TONER MOTOR EXECUTING... 14 00 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.) [Function] Used to cancel troubles other than U2. ∗ Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware reset. [Operation] 1) Initial display 14-00 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 16 00 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.) [Function] Used to cancel U2 trouble. When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and hardware reset is made. [Operation] 1) Initial display 16-00 U2 TRBL CANC. CLEARED 20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 20-01 M-CNT CLR. CLEARED 000,000 21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE) [Function] The code of the currently set maintenance cycle value is displayed (initial display) and the set data are saved. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setting 3,000 sheets 6,000 sheets 9,000 sheets 13,000 sheets 25,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets) Remark Default [Operation] 1) The current set value is displayed. 21-01 M-CYCLE 4:25,000 ( 0-5 ) 2) [→/10KEY] 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) 2) [←/10KEY] 21-01 M-CYCLE 3:13,000 ( 0-5 ) 22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT) [Function] The maintenance counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-01 M-CNT ***,*** e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8 3) [OK (ENTER)/START] 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) e-STUDIO162_151.book 9 ページ Main code 22 Sub code 02 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET) [Function] The quantity (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with TC21-01 is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-02 M-CNT PRESET ***,*** 04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT) [Function] The JAM total counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-04 JAM TTL CNT ***,*** 05 Total counter display (TTL CNT) [Function] The total counter value is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-05 TTL CNT ***,*** 06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT) [Function] The developer counter data is acquired and displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-06 DVLP CNT ***,*** 08 ADF counter display (ADF CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] The ADF counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-08 ADF CNT ***,*** 11 FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] The FAX-related counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT COUNTER 1:PAGE 2:TIME ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx ("xxx,xxx" is the current value.) ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT) 2) Select 2 TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx RX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx ("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.) ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". [Function] The drum counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-12 DRUM CNT ***,*** e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 10 ページ Main code 22 Sub code 14 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後1時49分 Contents Details of function/operation ROM version display (ROM VER.) [Function] The P-ROM version is displayed. Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the display version. Code number 0 1 2 Version Main unit Program F-IMC Program LCD DATA Display item MAIN PROG. F-IMC PROG. LCD DATA [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-14 ROM VER. MAIN PROG. 00.00 2) [→/10KEY] 22-14 ROM VER. F-IMC PROG. 00.00 2) [←/10KEY] 22-14 ROM VER. LCD DATA 00.00 16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] The duplex counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-16 DPLX CNT ***,*** 17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT) [Function] The copy counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-17 COPIES CNT ***,*** 18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT) [Function] The printer counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-18 PRT.CNT ***,*** 19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT) [Function] The scanner mode counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-19 S-MODE CNT ***,*** e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10 e-STUDIO162_151.book 11 ページ Main code 22 Sub code 21 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT) [Function] The scanner counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-21 SCAN CNT ***,*** 22 ADF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] The ADF JAM counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-22 S JAM CNT ***,*** 24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-01 JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 04 ADF counter clear (ADF CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the ADF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-04 ADF CLR. CLEARED 000,000 05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-05 DPLX CLR. CLEARED 000,000 06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-06 DVLP CLR. CLEARED 000,000 07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-07 DRUM CLR. CLEARED 000,000 08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-08 COPIES CLR. CLEARED 000,000 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11 e-STUDIO162_151.book 12 ページ Main code 24 Sub code 09 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-09 PRT.CLR. CLEARED 000,000 10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-10 FAX CLR. CLEARED 000,000 13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-13 SCAN CLR. CLEARED 000,000 14 ADF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the ADF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-14 S JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-15 S-MODE CLR. CLEARED 000,000 25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec. To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated. To check the developing bias, install the developing unit. After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK EXECUTING... 10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK) [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec. After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 25-10 LSU CHK EXECUTING... e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12 e-STUDIO162_151.book 13 ページ Main code 26 Sub code 02 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation (R)ADF setting (ADF/RADF) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set ADF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired ADF and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY) Main unit duplex setting (DPLX) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) Second cassette Second cassette NO Second cassette YES Display item OFF ON [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired duplex and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 06 Display item ADF OFF ADF ON RADF ON [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 04 ADF ADF NO ADF YES RADF YES Duplex Duplex NO Duplex YES Display item OFF ON [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Destination setting (DESTINATION) Code number 0 1 2 Destination Display item INCH AB – Inch series AB series AB series ∗ For AB series, there is no schedule for production. 07 Machine conditions check (CPM) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed. CPM 10 CPM 12 CPM 13 CPM 14 CPM 15 CPM 16 CPM Coy quantity 10 12 13 14 15 16 Remark [Operation] 1) The machine setting is displayed. 26-07 CPM 10 CPM 20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Rear edge void NO Rear edge void YES Display item OFF ON Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13 e-STUDIO162_151.book 14 ページ Main code 26 Sub code 30 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation CE mark support control ON/ OFF (CE MARK) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 37 Cancel of stop at developer life over (DVLP LIFE END) Setting CE mark support control OFF CE mark support control ON Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK) Remark Default (100V series) Default (200V series) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 39 Display item OFF ON Setting Stop at developer life over Cancel of stop at developer life over Display item STOP NONSTOP Remark [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed. Code number 8 Setting 8 MBYTE Remark [Operation] 1) Memory capacity display 26-39 MEM.CHK 8 MBYTE 40 42 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from completion of printing to turning OFF the motor) (LSU MOTOR OFF) Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 3 Setting 0sec 30sec 60sec 90sec Display item 0 SEC. 30 SEC. 60 SEC. 90 SEC. Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is displayed (initial display), and the set value is saved. (Setting range: 0 – 9, Default: 5) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Setting 0 msec –40 msec –30 msec –20 msec –10 msec 0 msec +10 msec +20 msec +30 msec +40 msec Remark Default ∗ The default “5” of transfer ON timing is “330ms passed from PS release.” ∗ When set to “0,” it is the same as setting to “5.” [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14 e-STUDIO162_151.book 15 ページ Main code 26 Sub code 43 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID) [Function] When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 – 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm)) 9 Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting 0 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 2.5 mm 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 5.5 mm Remark Default ∗ When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows: Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of “Set value x 0.5mm” is made.) [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 26-43 SIDE VOID 4( 0-10) 62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S) 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR) 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) [Function] Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 30 3) [OK (ENTER)/START] 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) Setting Copy lamp OFF Copy lamp half-ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD. Sensor Paper exit sensor No. 1 tray paper width sensor Paper entry sensor Duplex sensor No. 2 tray paper feed sensor New drum cartridge sensor Display item POD PD1 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST Remark ∗ Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed. ∗ The width sensor is available only in the FAX models. [Operation] 1) Initial display 30-01 P-SENSOR 2) When sensor ON 30-01 POD PD1 PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15 e-STUDIO162_151.book 16 ページ Main code 41 Sub code 06 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation OC cover float detection level (OC FLOAT LEVEL) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the ADF scan position to acquire the OC cover float detection level. When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed. If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0) Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed. ∗ If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs. [Operation] 1) Initial display 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL 0 2) [OK (ENTER)/START] 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL EXECUTING... <Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) When the level is acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** OK 3) When the level is not acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** ERR 43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [←/→/10KEY] key to change the setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 04 Fusing temperature setting in multi coy (FU TEMP MULTI) Set temperature (°C) 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temperature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to change the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 Set temperature (°C) 155 160 165 170 175 180 Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16 e-STUDIO162_151.book 17 ページ Main code 43 Sub code 05 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy (FU TEMP DPLX) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) [Function] In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the fusing temperature. When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START) Shift temperature (°C) ±0 -8 -6 -4 -2 ±0 +2 +4 +6 +8 Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed. Press [←/→/10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set temperature (°C) 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Remark Default [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17 e-STUDIO162_151.book 18 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation. Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT)(300dpi) TS mode (AE)(300dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT Default 50 50 50 50 TSAE 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] 4) [START] Fixing and printing value (No change on the LCD) ∗ Print is started in the set mode. 1) Initial display 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [←] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 4) To fix the set value without printing, press [OK (ENTER)] key. 2) [→] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TEXT 100% 50( 1-99) ∗ To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG, 3) [10KEY] Value entry press any key. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) ∗ When performing the AE mode exposure adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is not covered. [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TS mode (AE) (600dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE Default 50 50 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lampSCAN mode lamp COPY mode lampSCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18 e-STUDIO162_151.book 19 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 12 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value. All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value. For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the FAX mode). [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. AUTO XX ("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of normal text stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value. ADJUST EXP. AUTO YY 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. AUTO YY 4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value. Density adjustment value data table Mode STD (Normal text) Fine (Fine text) Photo Exposure adjustment value off on off Sfine (Super fine) on off When initializing each data: 50 [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. STD XX ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. STD YY 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. STD YY 4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. STD YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal text).) [Operation] 3) Scan start (self print) 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. FINE XX ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. ADJUST SCAN EXP. FINE YY 4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. FINE YY ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19 e-STUDIO162_151.book 20 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 15 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (normal text).) [Operation] 3) Scan start (self print) 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. S-FINE XX ADJUST SCAN ("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [10KEY]. ADJUST EXP. EXP. S-FINE YY 4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. S-FINE YY After completion of printing, returns to “2)” display. S-FINE YY ("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TS mode (AE) (300dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT Default 50 50 50 50 TSAE 50 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp ∗ No density display on LCD. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 21 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 19 2004年12月10日 金曜日 午前8時41分 Contents Details of function/operation Exposure mode setting (AE MODE) [Function] <γ table setting> When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed. (Default: US -1/Ex US -2) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [←/→] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <AE operation mode> When setting the γ table, press [→] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [←/→] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <PHOTO image process setting> When [→] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [←/→] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. Mode Display item γ GAMMA AE AE PHOTO PHOTO Code number 1 2 0 1 1 2 Setting content Image quality priority mode Toner consumption priority mode Lead edge stop Real time process Error diffusion process Dither process Remark US default EX US default Default Default [Operation] 2) [→] Mode selection 1) Initial display <γ table setting> 46-19 AE MODE GAMMA 2( 1-2) 3) [10KEY] Value input 46-19 AE MODE AE 0( 0-1) 2) [←] Mode selection 46-19 AE MODE PHOTO 1( 1-2) 20 ADF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL ADF) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) 46-19 AE MODE AE 1( 0-1) 4) [OK (ENTER)/START] Save the set value. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. [Function] Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the ADF mode. The adjustment is made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99) Mode ADF Display item ADF Default 50 Remark [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21 e-STUDIO162_151.book 22 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 29 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [←/→] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 – 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT)(600dpi) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT Default 50 50 50 50 TSAE 50 TS mode (AE)(600dpi) LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp ∗ No density display on LCD. 30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save). Change the setting and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. By pressing [←/→] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 – 31, Default: 0) Mode Limit value for AE Limit value for AE (toner save) Display item AE TSAE Remark <Remark> When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is changed, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection. 31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-19. [Function] Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode. Image quality Blurring Standard Sharpening Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 1) Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions. To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD. Mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) TS mode (AE) Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT Default setting 1 1 1 1 TSAE 1 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22 e-STUDIO162_151.book 23 ページ Main code 46 Sub code 32 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Copier color reproduction setting (COLOR REAPPEAR) [Function] Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copied can be switched. Set value 0 1 2 Colors easy to be copied Purple, Blue, Red Water blue, Green, Blue Yellow, Red, Green Colors difficult to be copied Yellow, Green, Water blue Purple, Red, Yellow Blue, Water blue, Purple ∗ This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents. When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 0) Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are changed for used in copying. To change the mode, press [←/→] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD. Specification component Green Red Blue Mode AE mode (including TS) TEXT mode (including TS) PHOTO mode 39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Setting No 0 1 2 Display item AE TEXT PHOTO Default setting 0 0 0 Remark Default LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. Sharpness adjustment value data table Mode Sharpness adjustment value 1: STD 2: FINE 3: S-FINE 4: FINE/PHOTO 5: S-FINE/PHOTO When initializing each data: 1 [Operation] 1) Initial display SHARPNESS SETTING PRESS ←,→ 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SHARPNESS SET (1-5) 1:STD 3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of [START] key is lighted. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) X 4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [10KEY]. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) Y ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.) ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display. 5) Scan start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING SCAN Y 6) Print start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING PRINT Y After completion of printing, returns to “4)” display. ("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD, FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/ PHOTO.) ("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on the FAX side.) ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to “2)” display. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23 e-STUDIO162_151.book 24 ページ Main code 48 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Main scan/sub scan direction magnification ratio (COPY MAG.) [Function] Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) Mode Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio 05 ADF/RADF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (ADF/RADF MAG.) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) Display item F-R SCAN Default value 50 50 LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to display the current ADF/RADF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD. When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default: 50) When adjusting the RADF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select single/duplex after entering the one page print mode, performing 2-page single copy. For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level, Density mode = MANUAL Density level = 3 Mode Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of ADF/RADF document Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the surface of RADF document *1 Display item SIDE1 Default 50 LED COPY mode lamp SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp ∗ When there is no document in ADF, copy is inhibited. *1: Only when RADF is installed. If installed, skipped. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24 e-STUDIO162_151.book 25 ページ Main code 49 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE) [Function] When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and the machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM. Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program. During writing, the display shows as follows: After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset. Status Download data receiving Loader function transfer Date delete start Data write (Boot section) Data write (Program section) Data write (EEPROM) Data write (LCD) During SUM CHECK During BOOT SUM CHECK During EEPROM SUM CHECK Download complete Display item RECEIVING LOADER COPYING FLASH ERASE BOOT WRITING PROGRAM WRITING E2PROM WRITING LCD DATE WRITING FLASH ROM SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECK DOWNLOAD COMPLETE! In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD. Error status PC data receiving Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete Boot section FLASH ROM write Program section FLASH ROM write Loader section SUM CHECK Boot section SUM CHECK Program section SUM CHECK E2PROM SUM CHECK E2PROM write E2PROM read Verify E2PROM collating Verify Boot section lens check Program section lens check E2PROM lens check Total data size check IMC communication error IMC FRASH ROM write LCD section lens check LCD section FLASH ROM write LCD section SUM CHECK Display item E-01 PC TRANS E-02 LOADER COPY E-03 FLASH ERASE E-04 BOOT WRITE E-05 PROGRAM WRITE E-06 LOADER SUM E-07 BOOT SUM E-08 PROGRAM SUM E-09 E2PROM SUM E-10 E2PROM WRITE E-11 E2PROM READ E-12 E2PROM COLLATE E-13 BOOT LENGTH E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH E-15 E2PROM LENGTH E-16 DATE SIZE E-17 IMC TRANS E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH E-20 LCD DATE WRITE E-21 LCD DATE SUM To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test command. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [←], turn on the power. [Operation] 1) Initial display DOWNLOAD MODE e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25 e-STUDIO162_151.book 26 ページ Main code 50 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE) [Function] Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50) When [←/→] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.) Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount Display item TRAY1 Default 50 TRAY2 50 MFT 50 DEN-A RRC-A DEN-B 50 50 50 LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual feed lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. [Adjustment procedure] 1) Set the print start position (A: COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void amount (B: PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at 100%. 2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.) ∗ The SFP adjustment is made by adjusting the ADF image scan start position after OC adjustment. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. (Example) Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm Image loss, R = 4mm 5mm 10mm [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26 e-STUDIO162_151.book 27 ページ Main code 50 Sub code 06 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Copy lead edge position adjustment (ADF/RADF) (ADF/RADF EDGE) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF/RADF is installed.) [Function] Used to adjust the ADF copy lead edge. When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm. The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position. The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50) When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RADF by pressing [2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Front surface document scan position adjustment (*) Back surface document scan position adjustment Rear edge void adjustment (ADF) Display item SIDE1 Default 50 LED COPY mode lamp SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp END 50 SCAN mode lamp (*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. ∗ When there is no document in the ADF, copy is inhibited. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFFCENTER) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning document. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.) When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center is shifted to left. The modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to cause black streaks on the edges. When the RADF is used, select the mode for use of the RADF by [2SIDED COPY] key. Mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) Display item TRAY1 Default 50 TRAY2 50 MFT 50 (*) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) SIDE2 50 LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp (*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. ∗ In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC regard- less of duplex setting. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 12 Document feed off-center adjustment (ORG.OFFCENTER) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range: 1 – 99, Default:50) When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left. Mode Platen document scan (*) ADF document front scan (*) RADF document back scan Display item OC ADF RADF Default 50 50 50 (*) : Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp e-STUDIO162_151.book 28 ページ Main code 50 Sub code 18 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (DPLX REVERSE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON with OC or ADF set) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Function] When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed. Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 – 99, Default: 50) For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy operation is performed from the rear edge of documents. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows: In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image, When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is on the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge is matched. Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data position stored in memory by the set value of this test command. Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory. Mode Display item OC memory reverse output position OC ADF memory reverse output position *1 ADF *1: Only when ADF/RADF is installed. If installed, skipped. Default 50 50 Document transport direction Print lead edge Lead edge void (1) Print start position Document transport direction Scan lead edge Scan end position (Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Scan direction LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Rear edge void Print rear edge Scan rear edge ∗ The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the simplex model. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. 19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (DPLX END EDGE) (Enabled when Duplex setting is ON) (Executable only when the RADF is installed.) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. (Adjustment range; 1 – 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Paper rear edge void amount Print start position (Duplex back surface) Display item DEN-B RRC-D Default 50 50 LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp ∗ The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC/ADF setting, or "2to2" for the RADF setting. ∗ When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28 e-STUDIO162_151.book 29 ページ Main code 51 Sub code 02 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.) [Function] Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RADF resist roller onto paper. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [←/→] key. Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. Mode Main cassette paper fed Display item TRAY1 Default 50 TRAY2 50 MFT 50 (*) RADF document paper feed (Front surface) SIDE1 50 (*) RADF document paper feed (Back surface) (*) Duplex back surface SIDE2 50 DUP-2 50 (*) 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed LED COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual feed lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp (*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. 53 08 ADF scan position automatic adjustment (ADF AUTO) (Disabled when set to OC) (Executable only when the ADF is installed.) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. [Function] Place a black chart so that it covers the ADF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the OC cover. When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display. ∗ Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 – 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm ∗ If the values are kept as the default values, ADF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the ADF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The ADF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the SPFG glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Mode ADF scan position auto adjustment ADF scan position manual adjustment Display item AUTO MANU Default 1 1 LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 ADF AUTO AUTO 100% ** 61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK) <When ERR> OK 53-08 ADF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR [Function] When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec. At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected. [Operation] 1) Initial display 61-03 LSU CHK EXECUTING... e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 30 ページ Main code 63 Sub code 01 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後3時40分 Contents Details of function/operation Shading check (SHADING CHK) [Function] Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading. When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the copy lamp is lighted. When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD. (3 digits) [Operation] 1) Initial display 63-01 SHADING CHK EXECUTING... 000 02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL) [Function] Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center. 10 Chart back surface When [OK (ENTER)/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD. ∗ Default: 0 ∗ If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. [Operation] 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 000 2) [OK (ENTER)/START] Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30 e-STUDIO162_151.book 31 ページ Main code 64 Sub code 01 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.) [Function] The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print command is received from the host, printing is made. When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.) Enter the code number and press [OK (ENTER)/START] key to start paper feed from the selected cassette and print in the selected pattern. Code number 0 1 2 3 Pattern 1by2 Grid pattern White paper Black background Display item 1 BY 2 CHECK WHITE BLACK ∗ For 4 – 99, flip. 66 01 FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Operation] The operation is similar to test command 21-01. [Function] Use to check the FAX soft SW setting. Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1. [Operation] 1) Initial display ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # (3 DIGITS) SW.___ ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), and the press [OK (ENTER)] key. No.### CHANGE? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO "xxxxxxxx" is the set content. ∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display. 3) Select 1 No.### xxxxxxxx USE # KEY 12345678 4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the press [OK (ENTER)] key. No.### STORED? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO "xxxxxxxx" is the set content. ∗ Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display. 5) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to initializing FAX soft SW. [Operation] 1) Initial display INITIALIZED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31 e-STUDIO162_151.book 32 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 03 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the FAX PWB memory. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT CHECK MEMORY PRESS ←, → 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 1:DRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 2:SRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 3:FLASH ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key CHECKING MEMORY 4) After completion of check • When the result is OK • In case of address bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT OK MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG • In case of sum check error • In case of data check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX SUM NG MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX DATA NG • In case of data bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG • In case of erase check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX ERASE NG ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value). Facsimile test command design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK e-STUDIO162_151.book 33 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 05 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value). Facsimile test command design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [←/→] / 2sec after Pressing [→] key or [←] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the image memory content. [Operation] • When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) • When there is no print data NO DATA • When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. [Function] Use to clear the image memory content. [Operation] • When there are some print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear, the buzzer sounds. CLEARED PLEASE POWER OFF • When there are no print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. Remains unchanged until the power is turned off. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33 e-STUDIO162_151.book 34 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 11 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS ←, → 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS ←, → 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34 e-STUDIO162_151.book 35 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 13 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to the dial test. [Operation] ■ Dial test (PULSE) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi- nated. 2) Select 1 INPUT MAKE TIME (0-15) ■ Dial test (DTMF) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 2 SELECT HIGH LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. ↓ __ 3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default ∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be made. 4) [OK (ENTER)] key SEND yyPPS xxms 1:YES 2:NO "yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20. "xx" is the input value. ∗ Select 2: Returns to “2)” display. 5) Select 1 Switched to 10/20PPS set with pulse selection inside. 6) After setting SENDING yyPPS xxms 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". Select 2 INPUT VALUE (0-15) ↓ __ ↓ 3) Select 1 SELECT LOW LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. ↓ Select 2 INPUT VALUE (0-15) ↓ __ ↓ 4) Select 1 INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default ∗ After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be made. 4) [OK (ENTER)] key H:xx 1:YES 2:NO L:yy "xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW. ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 5) Select 1 HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside. 6) After setting the signal send level SENDING DTMF 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO ∗ Select 2: Returns to “4)” display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 17 DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL # ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) [10KEY] input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35 e-STUDIO162_151.book 36 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 18 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value). [Operation] 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL # ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. SENDING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 2) [10KEY] input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 21 FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the FAX information. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT REPORT (1-3) PRESS ←, → 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT REPORT (1-3) 1:USER SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 2:SOFT SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 3:PROTOCOL ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key • When print is allowed • When print is inhibited PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) CAN NOT PRINT After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. [Function] Use to clear the FAST SRAM. [Operation] 1) Initial display CLEAR FAST SRAM 2) After completion of clearing CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the TEL/LIU status change. [Operation] 1) Initial display HS2 :xxx RHS :xxx HS1 :xxx EXHS:xxx ↑ The display is switched every 2sec. ↓ CHECKING PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36 e-STUDIO162_151.book 37 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 32 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Receive data check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the receive data. [Operation] 1) Initial display 2) After completion of reception RECEIVING RESULT xx "xx" is "OK" or "NG" depending on the check result. ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 33 Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the signal detection. [Operation] 1) Initial display CHECKING NONE PRESS CLEAR TO STOP When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following. CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 34 Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to measurement the communication time. [Operation] 1) Initial display COMM. TIME xx:xx:xx:xxx msec "xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond. ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 37 Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the speaker sound volume. 1: NO SOUND 2: LOW 3: MID 4: HIGH [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SPEEKER VOL. PRESS ←, → 2) [←/→] or after 2sec Every time when [→] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1. When [←] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT (1-4) 1:NO SOUND SELECT (1-4) 2:LOW ..... ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK (ENTER)] key STORED xxx xxx: Set content After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37 e-STUDIO162_151.book 38 ページ Main code 66 Sub code 38 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Contents Details of function/operation Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the time setting. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT TO SET 1:DATE 2:TIME ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revision of display) 3) Select 1 INPUT YEAR (4 DIGITS)____.__.__ 2) Select 2 xx:xx CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO "xx:xx" is the current value. 3) Select 1 INPUT HOUR (0-24) ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 4) Enter the year in 4 digits. 4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits. INPUT MONTH (1-12) 1998.__.__ 5) Enter the month in 2 digits. INPUT DAY (1-31) 1998.01.__ 6) Enter the day in 2 digits. xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) STORED? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value. ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 7) Select 1 INPUT MINUTE (00-59) 01:__ 5) Enter minute in 2 digits. xx:xx STORED? 1:YES 2:NO "xx:xx" is the current value. ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 6) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 41 CI signal check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) __:__ ∗ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". [Function] Use to check the CI signal. When CI signal is detected, OFF → ON. [Operation] 1) Initial display CHECKING CI:OFF PRESS CLEAR TO STOP ∗ [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 39 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時37分 5. Trouble codes A. Trouble codes list Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 IMC communication trouble 10 IMC trouble 13 IMC flash ROM error 16 IMC DIMM memory read/write check error 81 IMC communication interface error (parity) 82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun) 84 IMC communication interface error (Framing) E7 02 LSU trouble 10 Shading trouble (Black correction) 11 Shading trouble (White correction) 16 Abnormal laser output F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality F6 10 FAX board trouble H2 00 Thermistor open H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) L3 00 Scanner return trouble L4 01 Main motor lock detection L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection U1 03 FAX board battery error U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) 11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) U9 99 Operation panel language error B. Details of trouble codes Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 Content IMC communication trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC – CPU signal line abnormality IMC Memory defect/data abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy 10 Content IMC trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC. Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC. Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. and remedy 13 Content IMC flash ROM error Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM. Cause IMC abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. If downloading of the program is abnormally and remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download the program again to avoid this. Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 16 Content IMC DIMM memory read/write check error Detail An installation error occurs in the IMC memory module. An error occurs during access to the IMC memory. Cause Improper installation of the IMC memory module. IMC memory module abnormality IMC memory contact abnormality IMC abnormality. Check Check installation of the memory module. and Replace the memory module. remedy Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. 81 Content IMC communication interface error (parity) Detail A parity error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality Check Check the memory of the IMC. and Replace the MCU PWB with new one. remedy 82 Content IMC communication interface error (Overrun) Detail An overrun error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Check the memory of the IMC. and Replace the MCU PWB with new one. remedy 84 Content IMC communication interface error (Framing) Detail A framing error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Check the memory of the IMC. and remedy E7 02 Content LSU trouble Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON) Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or disconnection Polygon motor rotation abnormality Laser beams are not generated. MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check connection of the LSU connector. and Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU operations. remedy Check that the polygon motor rotates normally. Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams. Replace the LSU unit. Replace the MCU PWB. 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable. Check the CCD unit. and remedy e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 40 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時37分 Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate Copy lamp lighting abnormality CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality (When occurred in the ADF scan position.) Improper installation of the mirror unit Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. and remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (TC 05-03). Check the MCU PWB. 16 Content Abnormal laser output Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is detected. Cause Laser abnormality MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check the laser emitting diode operation. and Replace the MCU PWB. remedy F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality Detail The copy lamp does not turn on. Cause Copy lamp abnormality Copy lamp harness abnormality CCD PWB harness abnormality. Check Use TC 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations. and When the copy lamp lights up. remedy Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. When the copy lamp does not light up. Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. Replace the copy lamp unit. Replace the MCU PWB. F6 10 Content FAX board trouble Detail Communication trouble between MCU and FAX control PWB Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection Defective harness between FAX control PWB and MCU PWB Motherboard connector pin breakage FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality Check Check connector/harness of FAX control PWB and and MCU PWB. remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Check FAX control PWB ROM. Replace the FAX PWB. Main Sub Details of trouble code code H2 00 Content Thermistor open Detail The thermistor is open. The fusing unit is not installed. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection The fusing unit is not installed. Check Check the harness and the connector between and the thermistor and the PWB. remedy Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240°C. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection. Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking and operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp keeps ON. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection Detail The fusing temperature does not reach 185°C within 27 sec of turning on the power, or the fusing temperature keeps at 140°C. Cause Thermistor abnormality Heater lamp abnormality Thermostat abnormality Control PWB abnormality Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp blinking operation. and remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp does not light up. Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40 10_TESTCOMMAND.fm 41 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時37分 Main Sub Details of trouble code code L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) Detail The white area and the black marking on the shading plate are used to obtain the difference in the CCD level values for judgment of lock. When the difference in the levels of which and black is small, it is judged that the black mark could not be scanned by lock and the trouble code “L1” is displayed. Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch. Mirror unit abnormality The scanner wire is disconnected. The origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock switch is released. and remedy Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not feed. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble Detail When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Cause Mirror unit abnormality Scanner wire disconnection Origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Use TC 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating and operations. remedy When the mirror does not return. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use TC 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100 msec. Cause Main motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the main motor harness/ connector. Replace the main motor. Replace the MCU PWB. Main Sub Details of trouble code code L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation. Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use TC 61-1 to check the polygon motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the MCU PWB. U1 03 Content FAX board battery error Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery. and Replace the battery. remedy U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) Detail EEPROM access process error Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM) Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the EEPROM Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. U9 99 Content Operation panel language error Detail There is no language file. The language file is destroyed. Cause Language file abnormality MCU PWB abnormality Check MCU firmware download and Replace the MCU PWB. remedy e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41 11_MAINT.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時7分 [11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table : Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) Section Developing Process peripheral Parts 25K 50K 75K : Clean : Replace 100K 125K : Adjust ✩: Lubricate Remark Developer DV blade DV side seal (F/R) Drum 2. Maintenance display system Toner Developer Maintenance Life Remaining quantity LED Machine Life LED Machine LED Machine NEAR EMPTY About 10% ON Operation allowed 8K EMPTY Flash Stop 25K ON at 25K of the developer count. Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.) ∗ Default: Not Stop ∗ Clear: SIM 24-06 Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. ∗ Default: 25K ∗ Clear: SIM 20-1 Not stop. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D MAINTENANCE 11 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 [12] USER PROGRAM The user settings consist of the following items. 1. User programs A. Copy mode Program number Program name Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: 10 SEC. 2: 30 SEC. 3: 60 SEC. 4: 90 SEC. 5: 120 SEC. 6: OFF 1: 30 SEC. 2: 1 MIN. 3: 5 MIN. 4: 30 MIN. 5: 60 MIN. 6: 120 MIN. 7: 240 MIN. 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 5 MIN. 2: 30 MIN. 3: 60 MIN. 4: 120 MIN. 5: 240 MIN. 1 AUTO CLEAR 2 PREHEAT MODE 3 AUTO SHUT-OFF 4 AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME 5 STREAM FEEDING 1: ON 2: OFF 6 LAYOUT IN 2IN1 7 OFFSET FUNCTION ROTATE ORIG. IMAGE 1: PATTERN 1 2: PATTERN 2 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 9 AE/TEXT RESOLUTION 1: 300dpi 2: 600dpi 10 2-SIDED COPY MODE (e-STUDIO 162D/151D) 1: HI-SPEED 2: NORMAL 11 MARGIN WIDTH 8 12 13 14 1: 5mm (1/4") 2: 10mm (1/2") 3: 15mm (3/4") 4: 20mm (1") MEM. FOR 1: 30% PRINTER 2: 40% 3: 50% 4: 60% 5: 70% AUTO KEY REPEAT 1: ON 2: OFF KEY PRESS TIME 1: NORMAL 2: 0.5 SEC. 3: 1.0 SEC. 4: 1.5 SEC. 5: 2.0 SEC. Explanation • Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job. • This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be disabled. • This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received. • Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode. • This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key. Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key) can be used. • When copying using the ADF/RADF, while "SET ORIGINALS FOR STREAM FEEDING." appears in the display after an original has been scanned (about 5 seconds), a subsequent original can be placed and automatically fed into the machine. • Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied onto a single sheet of paper. • When enabled, this function offsets the position in the paper output tray of sets of copies during copy job, and print jobs when using the printer function. • When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet binding). • This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is slower when highquality mode is used. • If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided copying. • Use this setting to set the margin width. • Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode. • Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to increase when held down (for example, holding down the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^]), this program can be used to have the set value not change when the key is held down. • Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being changed by the accidental pressing of a key. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D USER PROGRAM 12 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ Program number 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Program name 15 KEY TOUCH SOUND 16 18 SOUND AT DEFAULT TONER SAVE MODE AE LEVEL ADJUST 19 LANGUAGE 20 RESET FACTORY 21 SORT AUTO SELECT 17 Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: LOW 2: HIGH 3: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ADF/RADF 2: DOCUMENT GLASS 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH 4: SPANISH : : 1: Yes 2: No 1: ON 2: OFF Explanation • This sets the volume of beep signals. • Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected. • This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT. • This is used to adjust the exposure level. • The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass and the ADF/RADF. • The factory default setting for the exposure level is "center". This is used to set the language used in the display. This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings. Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode. B. Print mode Program number Program name Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: ON 2: OFF 1 FORCED OUTPUT 2 USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH *1 1: FULL-SPEED 2: HI-SPEED 3 AUTO TRAY SWITCH*2 1: ON 2: OFF Explanation When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode. This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver. (For the system requirements.) If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the bypass tray). The function can be disabled. *1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably. *2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D USER PROGRAM 12 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2. Selecting a setting for a user program 1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK (ENTER)] key. In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply pressing the [MENU] key. (e-STUDIO151/151D) (e-STUDIO162/162D) MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM OK 1 1 2 2 2 1,2,3, 1,2,3, 2 1 1 AUTO ZOOM SP. FUNC 2) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the [OK (ENTER)] key. • You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys. (e-STUDIO151/151D) Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep) The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND". The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows: Key entry beep: One beep Base setting beep: Three beeps Invalid key beep: Two beeps Base settings The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy setting. The base settings are as follows: Copy ratio: 100% Paper feed location: Light and Dark level: center Tray 1 (Upper paper tray) AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO (e-STUDIO162/162D) USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE OK 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1,2,3, 1,2,3, AUTO ZOOM SP. FUNC 3) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of the selected item. (e-STUDIO151/151D) (e-STUDIO162/162D) PREHEAT MODE 1:30 SEC. PREHEAT MODE 1:30 SEC. OK 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1,2,3, 1,2,3, SP. FUNC AUTO ZOOM NOTE: • If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key [C] and repeat the procedure from step 2). • To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key. 4) Press the [OK (ENTER)] key. Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen appears. NOTE: When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the [OK (ENTER)] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [OK (ENTER)] key. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D USER PROGRAM 12 - 3 Reg SDRAM e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1 Driver Driver Sensor/SW PAPD,PPD3, PD2,CED2 Mechanical load CPFS2 3.3V Toner Motor Driver Mirror Motor Driver (296pin) LSU LASER D[15…0] A[19…1] Polygon Motor LCX574 2Kbyte EEPROM OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA POWER SUPPLY AC Code D[7..0] RD CS INT PSW 4Mb or 8Mb or 16Mb 8bit LCD (2 x 20) START KEY HC238 (3 to 8 decode) 8bit HC151 PSL LED OA982 Flash ROM OPE PWB SDRAM 256Mbx1 Optional 16.1511MHz Buzzer KEY Matrix Copier 24pcs 12MHz ISP1581 LED Copier 11pcs FAX I/F FAX only (Optional) FAX Modem / LIU PCBA LED Driver P-Bus USB RJ45 (N/W connector) (Power Supply unit) DC Adapter Network BOX Optional LCD E LCD RS LCD R/W(TBD) LCD DB7-4 KEYSCAN1-3 SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN PSL TC, GRID, MC, BIAS HVU CPU CLK(19.6608MHz) SSCG /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,24V PMCLK 8Mbit CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) System Reset 8 8 UART ADF Motor Driver Image BUS(PI-Bus) Image BUS(PO-Bus) Reset IC 3.3V HOME POSITION SENSOR 1Mbit SRAM Flash ROM MHPS DC-DC 0 - 24V Lamp Inverter CCFL x 2 PWM 8bits (MSB/LSB) KRONOS ASIC 16bits AD 3.3V HC151 M P X Main Motor Scanner CLK(48MHz) Printer CLK(16.1511MHz) 16Mbyte A5V IEEE 1284 I/F AFE(AD9826) A C G D C S 12V LVC1284 R G B 2nd Cassette (Optional) I E E E 1 2 8 4 CCD Driver Fan Motor (1speed) Shifter Motor Duplex Motor MCU-PWB 5V CCD (uPD8861) 12V /MMD CCD PWB /MMRDY Carriage Unit PMD Speaker LED 3 pcs KEY Matrix 21 pcs FAX OPE PWB Optional SDOD SPOD Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 Note: Energy-saving 1W correspondence) CPU I/O CPU INTERRUPT SPPD Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) (Counter) MCNT (ADF UNIT SGS, SRRC, SPUS, SPPS, MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 Mechanical Load 1 ページ USB2.0 High-speed 13_ELECT.fm 2004年12月22日 水曜日 午後2時8分 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram A. Overall block diagram e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 2. Circuit descriptions A. Main PWB (MCU) (1) General The MCU PWB is composed of: • CPU peripheral section which performs mechanical sequence control, U/I, and each function job management. The CPU connects with the ASIC and memory by use of the system bus and performs jog management and sequence control of the whole engine. • Image process ASIC which performs image process, CCD control, LSU control, and print control. • OA982 peripheral section which performs E-Sort and FAX control. The OA982 performs image data input/output with the ASIC, SDRAM memory management, and communication with USB2.0 devices. • I/F section for USB2.0 and IEEE1284 control. (For the AL series, IEEE1284 is not available.) • Motor control circuit • Mechanical load, sensor I/O circuit It performs control and management of the process, the transport loads, the fusing, the optical, and the operation panel sections for executing a series of copy/print/scan operations. (2) CPU signal table (H8S/2321) PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 /CS1 /CS0 GND GND Vcc A0 A1 A2 A3 GND A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 GND A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 GND A20 PSW 31 SPPD 32 CCD_TG 33 MHPS 34 /CPUSYNC 35 36 37 GND GND FW Signal code Input/ Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Interruption level input Interruption level input Interruption level input Interruption level input Interruption level input Interruption level input Operating SRAM chip select Flash ROM chip select DGND DGND CPU3.3V Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus DGND Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus DGND Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus Address bus DGND Pull-Up Print SW ADF paper sensor CCD horizontal sync signal Mirror Home Position Horizontal sync (ASIC) DGND DGND Zero cross signal PIN No. 38 ARB_INT 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 Vcc D0 D1 D2 D3 GND D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 GND D12 D13 D14 D15 Vcc POFF TxD1 SDA SCL LCDRS LCDE GND CS4 (FAX) GND GND RY/BY LCDDB4 LCDDB5 BZR LCDDB7 LCDDB6 Reset OUT1 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 WDTOVF /RES NMI STBY Vcc XTAL EXTAL GND CPUCLK Vcc PRINTST /RD /HWR /LWR SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 ESSTS ESCMD GND GND ESSRDY ESCRDY AVcc Vref RTH Signal code Input/ Output Interruption level input Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Data I/O Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Output Output Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Input Output Analog input e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2 Operating ASIC interruption CPU3.3V Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus DGND Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus DGND Data bus Data bus Data bus Data bus CPU3.3V Shut off control For debug EEPROM Data bus EEPROM clock LCD control LCD control DGND Chip select (FAX) DGND DGND Flash Busy signal LCD control LCD control Buzzer signal LCD control LCD control Reset signal Duplex Motor signal Duplex Motor signal Duplex Motor signal Duplex Motor signal NC Pull-Up Reset NC Pull-Up NC Pull-Up CPU3.3V Clock Clock DGND NC CPU3.3V Print start signal Read signal Write signal (High address) Write signal (Low address) HC151 select signal HC151 select signal HC151 select signal E-sort control E-sort control DGND DGND E-sort control E-sort control CPU3.3V CPU3.3V Fusing thermistor e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ PIN No. 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Signal code ESPAGE SIN1 SIN2 SIN3 KEY IN MSUST1 Avss GND /SCANSP /SCANST /TRANSST PMCLK SPMT3 SPMT2 SPMT1 SPMT0 GND GND Vcc PSL /CS3 /CS2 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Input/ Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Operating E-sort control HC151 select detection HC151 select detection HC151 select detection Pull up NC NC DGND DGND Scan STOP signal Scan START signal ASIC transfer signal Polygon clock ADF motor signal ADF motor signal ADF motor signal ADF motor signal DGND DGND CPU3.3V Power save LED control Chip select signal ASIC chip select (3) Image process ASIC (HG73C114HF) a. General The ASIC is composed of the three blocks: the image process block, the print control block, and the I/F block. Image process section According to the operation mode set by the register set value, the image data from the CCD PWB are placed under shading, AE process, input gamma process, area separation, filter process, resolution conversion, zoom process, output gamma process, and binary coding. Print control section During copying, image-processed data are outputted to the LSU at the timing of LSU writing. I/F section This section performs DRUM control as image data buffer, image data send/receive with the OA982, and data send/receive with the IEEE1284 I/F. nCS2 PORT1OUT[15..0] nRD I/O PORT nLWR A[9..1] CPU BUS I/F OPE-LATCH D[15..0] LED Driver Control nRESET JTAG to SDRAM 64Mb or 128Mb (Op.400MByte) PORT2OUT[10..0] TONER MOTOR Control OPE-DATA OPE-CLK TMCLK,TMEN TM,TM- to OPU-PWB to TONER MOTOR DRIVER CCD-RS,CCD-CK1,CCD-CK2 to CCD(SCAN UNIT) CCD-CP,CCD-SHR bsmp,vsmp,mclk,OEB afesen,afesck,afesdi to AFE(SCAN UNIT) AFE-DB[7..0] to USB I/F to IEEE1284 I/F MIRCNT,MTR-Y1,MTR-PH-1,MTR-I01,MTR-I11,MTR-I21 MTR-Y2,MTR-PH-2,MTR-I02,MTR-I12,MTR-I22 to MIRROR MOTOR DRIVER SYNC to LSU-PWB LD LEND to CCFL(Scan UNIT) CL CPUSYNC e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 b. ASIC (Signal table) PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 cpudata7 cpudata6 cpudata5 cpudata4 VCC_AC cpudata3 cpudata2 cpudata1 cpudata0 GND_AC mircnt IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT IN/OUT Power OUT CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus CPU data bus Buffer IC 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 cpusync mem_intr arb_intr VCC_core cpu_ad8 cpu_ad7 cpu_ad6 cpu_ad5 GND_core ram_clk_in OUT CPU OUT Power IN IN IN IN Power IN CPU ADF scanner select signal CPU SYNC signal Not used INTR signal CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus ASIC 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 cpu_ad4 cpu_ad3 cpu_ad2 cpu_ad1 cpu_ad0 xcpucs sfclk GND_core xcpuwr xcpurd nrst IN IN IN IN IN IN IN Power IN IN IN SDRAM clock on the board CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CPU address bus CS signal Clock 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 VCC_core pfclk2 clock_sw GND_core pfclk1_xout pfclk1 VSSPLL2 VDDPLL2 VSS2 VDDI2 tm2_15m xsync Power IN IN Power OUT IN X-tal units X-tal units IN LSU 45 46 47 48 49 GND_AC xld xlend VCC_AC mmd Power OUT OUT Power OUT 50 51 pmd tc OUT OUT I/O Tr array IC 52 gridl OUT Tr array IC Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Oscillator CPU CPU SYSTEM RESET Description CPU write signal CPU read signal SYSTEM RESET Not used Pull up VIDEO clock VIDEO clock Pull up Pull up Pull up Pull up Pull up Horizontal sync signal from LSU (/SYNC) LSU LSU Laser drive signal Laser APC signal Tr array IC Main motor control signal. "H": Main motor ON Polygon motor drive Transfer charger control signal. "H":ON Main charger grid control signal. "H": L output PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description No. 53 mc OUT Tr array IC Main charger control signal. "H": ON 54 bias OUT I/O HV bias drive 55 NC OUT I/O Not used 56 vfmcnt OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan rotation speed control signal. "H": High speed, "L": Low speed 57 VCC_core Power 58 vfm OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control signal. "H": Fan ON 59 /FPOFF OUT I/O FAX poff signal 60 GND_core Power 61 DEV DIR OUT I/O CRUM bus control 62 spfclh OUT Tr array IC ADF/RADF resist roller clutch control signal "H":ON 63 spfrsol OUT Tr array IC ADF/RADF document feed solenoid control signal "H":ON 64 spfgsol OUT Tr array IC ADF/RADF gate solenoid control signal "H":ON 65 spfpsol OUT Tr array IC ADF/RADF document transport solenoid control signal "H":ON 66 VCC_core Power 67 bias OUT Tr array IC DV bias control signal. "H":ON 68 lden OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control signal. "H": Laser circuit ON 69 GND_AC Power 70 MRPS1 OUT I/O ADF current control 71 MRPS2 OUT I/O ADF current control 72 MRPS3 OUT I/O ADF current control 73 CPFS1 OUT I/O 1st cassette pick up solenoid 74 VCC_AC Power 75 CPFS2 OUT I/O 2nd cassette pick up solenoid 76 pr OUT I/O Power relay control 77 hl OUT Tr array IC Heater lamp control signal. "H":ON 78 GND_core Power 79 MPFS OUT I/O Multi-bypass solenoid 80 miron OUT Buffer IC ADF scanner select signal 81 spfon OUT Buffer IC ADF ON signal 82 KEYSC1 OUT I/O Key sense control 83 KEYSC2 OUT I/O Key sense control 84 KEYSC3 OUT I/O Key sense control 85 IMC ready OUT I/O IMC control 86 VCC_core Power 87 tmx OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control signal 88 tm OUT Buffer IC Toner motor control signal 89 op_data OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit data signal 90 ope_latch OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit latch signal. Data take-in at "L" 91 GND_AC Power e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description No. 92 op_clk OUT Tr array IC Operation circuit clock signal 93 VCC_AC Power 94 scanstop IN CPU Scan stop signal 95 testpin0 IN TEST TEST 96 testmode_on IN TEST TEST 97 ie1284_stb IN I/F board /STB signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 98 ie1284_autofd IN I/F board /AUTOFD signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 99 VCC_core Power 100 ie1284_slctin IN I/F board /SLCTIN signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 101 ie1284_init IN I/F board /INIT signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 102 ie1284_slct OUT I/F board SLCT signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 103 GND_core Power 104 ie1284_pe OUT I/F board PE signal (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 105 ie1284_busy OUT I/F board BUSY signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 106 ie1284_ack OUT I/F board /ACK signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 107 ie1284_fault OUT I/F board /FAULT signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 108 VCC_core Power 109 ie1284_rev OUT I/F board /REV signal connector (IEEE1284 communication port) 110 ie1284_parad7 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 111 ie1284_parad6 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 112 ie1284_parad5 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 113 ie1284_parad4 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 114 ie1284_parad3 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 115 ie1284_parad2 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 116 VCC_AC Power 117 ie1284_parad1 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 118 ie1284_parad0 IN/OUT I/F board DATA bus (IEEE1284 connector communication port) 119 suspend OUT I/F board SUSPEND signal connector (USB communication port) 120 GND_AC Power 121 oen OUT I/F board OEN signal (USB connector communication port) 122 vmout OUT I/F board VMOUT signal (USB connector communication port) 123 vpout OUT I/F board VPOUT signal (USB connector communication port) 124 GND_core Power PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to No. 125 vmin IN I/F board connector 126 vpin IN I/F board connector 127 rcv IN I/F board connector 128 scanst IN CPU 129 printst IN Start signal 130 receptst IN Start signal 131 transst IN CPU 132 VCC_core 133 dci_dat7 Power IN 134 dci_dat6 IN 135 dci_dat5 IN 136 dci_dat4 IN 137 dci_dat3 IN 138 dci_dat2 IN 139 dci_dat1 IN 140 dci_dat0 IN 141 GND_core 142 out_dc_req Power IN 143 in_dc_req IN 144 GND_AC 145 out_dc_ack Power OUT 146 out_dc_wt OUT 147 VCC_AC 148 in_dc_ack Power OUT 149 in_dc_cs OUT 150 dco_dat7 OUT 151 dco_dat6 OUT 152 dco_dat5 OUT 153 dco_dat4 OUT 154 dco_dat3 OUT 155 VCC_AC 156 dco_dat2 Power OUT 157 dco_dat1 OUT 158 dco_dat0 OUT 159 160 161 162 163 164 hsync GND_core out_req in_ack in_cs GND_AC E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) Description VMIN signal (USB communication port) VPIN signal (USB communication port) RCV signal (USB communication port) Scan start signal Start signal Start signal Data transfer start signal E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT control signal E-SORTcontrol signal E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT control signal E-SORT control signal E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORTcontrol signal E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) E-SORT (OA982) FAX E-SORTcontrol signal E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus E-SORT data bus FAX Power Not used Not used Not used Power e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ PIN No. 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 Signal Name 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 IN/OUT Connected to mdat00 mdat01 mdat02 mdat03 VCC_core mdat04 mdat05 mdat06 GND_core mdat07 mdat08 mdat09 VCC_AC mdat10 mdat11 mdat12 VCC_core mdat13 mdat14 mdat15 GND_AC pcl_s_print fax_s_print es_s_print out_ack out_cs in_req VCC_core TCK TMS TRSTA TDI TDO GND_core afp_vsmp ccd_tg ccdrs afp_bsmp ccdcp afe_sdata ccd_ph2 ccd_ph1 afp_afesen GND_core afp_adcclk VCC_core afp_afesck GND_AC afp_data7 afp_data6 afp_data5 afp_data4 afp_data3 afp_data2 afp_data1 afp_data0 VCC_AC cl Power OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT OUT OUT Power OUT Power OUT Power IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN Power OUT 223 GND_core 224 mtr_y3 225 mtr_y2 Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Power Not used Not used Not used Power Not used Not used Not used Power Not used Not used Not used Power Not used Not used Not used Power Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Power JTAG JTAG JTAG JTAG JTAG Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB AFE control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal AFE control signal CCD control signal AD's serial data CCD control signal CCD control signal AFE control signal CCD PWB AFE control signal CCD PWB AFE control signal CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB CCD PWB Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Logic IC Copy lamp control signal Power OUT I/O OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal Carriage motor current control signal PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description No. 226 mtr_y1 OUT Tr array IC Carriage motor current control signal 227 VCC_core Power 228 mtr_phase2 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 229 mtr_i02 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 230 mtr_i12 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 231 mtr_i22 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 232 mtr_phase1 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 233 mtr_i01 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 234 mtr_i11 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 235 mtr_i21 OUT Motor driver Carriage motor control signal 236 GND_AC Power 237 ram_mad3 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 238 ram_mad2 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 239 GND_core Power 240 ram_mad1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 241 ram_mad0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 242 ram_mad10 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 243 VCC_core Power 244 ram_banks1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) BANK signal 245 ram_banks0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) BANK signal 246 xram_cs OUT SDRAM (Image process page memory) CS signal 247 xram_ras OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) RAS signal 248 xram_cas OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) CAS signal 249 VCC_AC Power 250 xram_wde OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) WDE signal 251 ram_dqm0 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) DQM signal 252 GND_AC Power 253 ram_data7 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 6 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description No. 281 VCC_core Power 282 ram_mad8 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 283 ram_mad7 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 284 VCC_AC Power 285 ram_mad6 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 286 ram_mad5 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 287 ram_mad4 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 288 GND_AC Power 289 cpudata15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 290 cpudata14 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 291 cpudata13 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 292 cpudata12 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 293 cpudata11 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 294 cpudata10 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 295 cpudata9 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus 296 cpudata8 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus (4) Reset circuit This circuit detects ON/OFF of the power source, and controls start/ stop of each circuit. The voltage of 3.3V in the MCU PWB is detected by the reset IC to generate the reset signal. When the power voltage reaches the specified level, each circuit is operated, but stopped before the power voltage falls below the specified level in order to protect against malfunction of the circuit. The CPU/Flash ROM is reset by the power reset circuit, and system reset of ASIC, OA982, FAX, and NIC is generated from the CPU (generalpurpose port output). Reset IC VCC3 1 1 VCC3 2 8 7 6 5 /RESET0 C22 0.1u M51957BFP 2 10kF 1 NC VCC OUT Cd 1 R20 R19 3.3kJ IC4 1 NC 2 IN 3 NC 4 GND e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 7 C23 OPEN 2 2 R18 11kF 1 PIN Signal Name IN/OUT Connected to Description No. 254 ram_data6 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 255 ram_data5 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 256 ram_data4 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 257 GND_core Power 258 ram_data3 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 259 ram_data2 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 260 ram_data1 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 261 ram_data0 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 262 GND_AC Power 263 ram_data15 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 264 ram_data14 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 265 VCC_AC Power 266 ram_data13 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 267 ram_data12 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 268 ram_data11 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 269 ram_data10 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 270 ram_data9 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 271 ram_data8 IN/OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) data bus 272 VCC_core Power 273 ram_dqm1 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) DQM signal 274 ram_cke OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) CKE signal 275 GND_AC Power 276 ram_clk_out SDRAM SDRAM's clock 277 GND_core Power 278 ram_mad12 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 279 ram_mad11 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 280 ram_mad9 OUT SDRAM SDRAM (Image process page memory) address bus 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ (2-C4) e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (5) Heater lamp control circuit The CPU converts the inputted analog voltage into a digital value. The digital conversion value and the set value of the test command are compared to control ON/OFF of the heater lamp according to the level, controlling the heat roller surface temperature to be the fixed level. 12V 1 VCC3 1 R68 7.5kF 1 FTH (5-B2) 2 1 12V C110 0.1u 2 R71 4.3kF 1 MA700 4 1 2 2 R70 10kF 2 2 2 2 3 + D1 1 R69 1kJ IC22A KIA393F 8 R67 1MF 1 R66 1kF 1 VCC3 2 a. Outline The heater lamp control circuit detects the heat roller surface temperature, and converts the temperature into a voltage. The converted voltage is inputted to the CPU. VCC3 VCC3 D3 D2 1 1 12V 3 3 2 2 8 KDS226 3 + (11-C1) RTH_IN KDS226 IC24A KIA358F 1 1 R81 300J 2 1 R82 100J RTH (1-A3) 2 12V 4 C111 22000p 1 8 THOPEN (4-A4) R87 240J 1 R85 10kF 2 1 7 6 - 3 R86 240J 5 + 2 1 1 2 2 4 (11-B2) (6-A1) (6-A1) (6-A1) (11-B2) 2 PMCLK_A MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /LDEN 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 R84 10kJ C114 22000p 2 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 1 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G IC22B KIA393F 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 PMCLK MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 LDEN HL FTH 0.1u 5V R83 1.2kF IC26 (1-A2) (2-C1) (2-D1) (2-D1) (2-C1) (2-D1) (5-E3) 12V C113 2 2 VCC3 1SS355 Q2 KRA119S C112 0.1u INT5V D4 1 1 2 - 2 2 KID65503F HLOUT (10-B3) [High temperature protection circuit in case of CPU hung up (uncontrollable)] For IC22 3Pin (reference voltage), +3.3V is divided by the resistor. The thermistor terminal voltage is inputted to IC22 2Pin. When, therefore, the voltage at 2Pin falls below the voltage at 3Pin, IC22 1Pin becomes "H" and the HL signal is pulled to the GND level, suppressing generation of the lighting signal of the heater lamp. (IC22 output 1Pin is normally Low.) [When the heat roller surface temperature is lower than the set level] a. When the thermistor terminal voltage is higher than the set level, the output signal HL from ASIC becomes HIGH level. b. This HL signal becomes the HLOUT signal through IC26, and is inputted to the photo triac coupler in the power PWB. When, therefore, the HL signal is HIGH, the internal triac turns on. c. When the internal triac turns on, the heater lamp lights up. [When the heat roller surface temperature is higher than the set level] a. When the thermistor terminal voltage falls below the set level, the output signal HL from ASIC becomes LOW level. b. The HL signal becomes LOW, the power PWB photo triac coupler turns OFF, and the heater lamp turns OFF. [When the thermistor is open] The voltage at IC22 6Pin becomes higher than the voltage at 5Pin, and the 7Pin output THOPEN becomes LOW. This is inputted to the CPU to display the trouble code H2. (6) Driver circuit (Clutch, solenoid) Since a load cannot be directly driven by each load signal from the CPU or the ASIC, each load is driven through the driver IC (transistor array). A large drive current (load current) is ordained from a small input current (ASIC output current). When the driver input voltage (base resistor input) is HIGH, the transistor turns ON to flow a current through the load, operating the load. +24V ASIC/CPU OUT PUT e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 8 LOAD LOAD e-STUDIO162_151.book 9 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (7) Toner motor control circuit The IC32 is the motor drive IC, which generates pseudo-AC waveforms by the pulse signal from the ASIC to drive the toner supply motor. Tonner Motor Driver 1 + C129 2 1 24V 0.1u/50V 2 C128 10u/35V IC32 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 7 10 11 12 13 2 R113 47kJ 2 R112 47kJ 19 20 18 21 R106 1kJ 1 1 (4-D3) (TM) (4-D3) (TM_) R105 1kJ PGND PGND Vcc PSAVE VM Rin OUT1 Fin OUT2 VREF RNF NC GND FIN NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 17 16 9 5 TMB_O (11-A1) TMA_O (11-A1) 6 8 FIN 25 24 23 22 15 14 BA6920FP PGND (8) Main motor control circuit/ LSU (Polygon motor) control circuit The motors are driven by the MMD (main motor) signal and the PMD (polygon motor) signal from the ASIC. The MMD signal and the PMD signal are turned HIGH and sent through the driver IC27 to the control circuit in the main motor/LSU, rotating each motor. When the motor RPM reaches the specified level, the MMLD signal (main) and the PMLD signal (LSU) become LOW. The CPU detects it to start process control. 5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 /MMD MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 /POFF /PMD (11-A4) (6-A3) (6-A3) (6-A3) (10-B4) (11-B2) R88 10kJ Q3 KRC106S 3 2 (2-C1) MMD (2-A3) MM_Y1 (2-A3) MM_Y2 (2-C1) MM_Y3 (1-D3) POFF (2-C1) PMD (2-C1) /LEND 1 IC27 SHOLD (11-B2) 2 1 KID65503F (9) Mirror motor control circuit, ADF motor control circuit, Duplex motor control circuit, Shifter motor control circuit. Stepping motors are employed for the mirror motor, the ADF motor, and the duplex motor. The driver for IC29 (for the mirror motor) is the bipolar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC31 (for the ADF) is the uni-polar drive constant current drive IC. The drive for IC28 (for the duplex) and IC30 (for the shifter) is the constant current drive IC. Each motor is driven in W1-2 phase excitement, 1-2 phase excitement, or 2-phase excitement. The mirror motor/ADF motor related to image scan are driven by a constant current, and each motor current is switched in each magnification ratio. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 9 e-STUDIO162_151.book 10 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Scanner Motor Driver (10-D2) (10-D2) (10-D2) (10-D2) OUT_AOUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_B- 24VM 5V R89 R90 1 PGND 2 (2-A3) MM_BI0 (2-A3) MM_BI1 (2-A3) MM_PH_B 1 1 R93 1kJ 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS MM_AI0 1 L6219DS or AMM56219 R94 30kJ R95 30kJ C118 820p 2 1 2 PGND PGND PGND PGND 1 2 2 2 MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 C121 0.1u 2 (5-C1) (5-C1) (5-C1) PGND 5V C119 0.1u R98 510J 2 2 2 1 1 1 R97 1kJ 1 C115 820p (2-A3) MM_AI1 (2-A3) MM_PH_A (2-A3) 2 2 C117 820p OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C116 820p 5V R96 2kJ 2 0.68J 1W R91 1.5kJ IC29 2 1 R92 1.5kJ 1 1 0.68J 1W 1 2 1 1 PGND PGND ADF Motor Driver C125 2200p 1 1 R99 2 2 7.5kJ R100 7.5kJ 1 1 C126 2 2 2200p C127 OPEN 1 PGND 2 2 2 23 20 25 3 24 19 12 18 2 2200p PGND 2 2W R115 1kJ 2 OPEN CrA CrB VsA RsA VrefA VrefB RsB VsB Vmm OUT /A OUT A OUT /B OUT B In /A In A In /B In B PG PG 22 1 4 14 11 SPMT_2 SPMT_0 SPMT_3 SPMT_1 (11-E1) (11-D1) (11-D1) (11-E1) 15 28 C136 OPEN MTD1361/F 2 2 PGND 1 C137 26 27 17 16 2200p 1 1 R114 1J C135 1 1 2 R111 2.4kJ 2 1 0.1u 1 MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 C134 2 1 2 R110 100J 2 R109 1.2kJ 2 2 (5-C2) (5-C2) (5-C2) 1 1 1 R108 620J R107 300J 2 24VM OPEN IC31 R104 2.4kJ 1 C130 C132 1 1 R101 1kJ 2W 2 R103 1J R102 750J 2 1 1 1 5V PGND PGND (4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D3) (ADFMT2) (ADFMT0) (ADFMT3) (ADFMT1) Duplex Motor Driver Shifter Motor Driver IC28 (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 17 18 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND O1 O2 O3 O4 2 7 9 16 IC30 /DMT0 (11-B3) /DMT1 (11-B3) (4-B2) SFTMT0 /DMT2 (11-B3) (4-B2) SFTMT1 /DMT3 (11-B3) (4-B2) SFTMT2 24VDup (4-B2) SFTMT3 COM COM TD62064AF 1 8 D5 R338 1 0J 2 R339 1 0J R340 1 0J 2 R341 1 0J 2 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 MTZ J22B I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND O1 O2 O3 O4 2 7 9 16 PGND e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 10 /SFTMT1 (11-A1) /SFTMT2 (11-A1) /SFTMT3 (11-A1) 24VSFT COM COM 1 8 TD62064AF PGND /SFTMT0 (11-A1) D6 MTZ J22B e-STUDIO162_151.book 11 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 (10) OPE PWB (11) Carriage Unit a. Outline The operation circuit is composed of the LCD control circuit, the key matrix circuit, the display matrix circuit, and the buzzer circuit, realizing the U/I functions. b. LCD control circuit The character LCD (COG) in 2 lines and 16 digits is used. The display data are sent from the MCU (CPU) to LCD internal registers, controlling the LCD. c. Key matrix circuit The SEL signal is sent from the CPU of MCU to the matrix selector IC (multiplexer) in the operation circuit. The signal detects OFF/ON of the key, and is sent to the CPU as serial data. d. LED matrix circuit The display is controlled by inputting the serial data signal, the clock signal, and the latch signal from ASIC to the LED driver in the operation circuit. In the LED driver, data are set to the register (8bit) and latched to control the IC output port, performing matrix-driving of ON/OFF of the LED. a. Outline The carriage unit is provided with the CCD PWB, the inverter PWB, the lamps, etc. A document is radiated, and image data read by the CCD are A/D converted to be sent to the ASIC. b. CCD PWB The color image sensor uPD8861 (5400 pixels x 3 lines) is used as the CCD on the CCD PWB to scan images in the resolution of 600dpi/US letter size in the main scanning direction. Image data scanned by the CCD are inputted to AFE (AD9826), where they are A/D-converted to output digital data. The output digital data are sent to the MCU PWB and to the ASIC. The ASIC performs image process with the digital data. c. Lamp inverter PWB Rush current prevention circuit Rectifying/ smoothing circuit Noise filter circuit Inverter circuit (Ringing choke converter system) The transformer is controlled by the lamp control signal from the MCU PWB to turn ON/OFF the cool cathode ray tube by the transformer output. B. DC power circuit The DC power circuit directly rectifies the AC power and performs switching-conversion with the DC/DC converter circuit, and rectifies and smoothes again to generate a DC voltage. The constant voltage control circuit is of +5VEN. +24V and +12V are of the non-control system by winding from the +5VEN winding. As shown in fig (1), +24V, +12V, and +5V are provided with the ON/OFF function by external signals. +3.3V is outputted from +5VEN to the regulator IC. Refer to the block diagram, fig (1). Rectifying/ smoothing circuit (Semiconductor switch) +12V regulator IC (with ON/OFF function) Rectifying/ smoothing circuit (Semiconductor switch) Control circuit Overcurrent protection circuit Constant-voltage detection circuit +3.3V regulator IC fig (1) Block diagram (1) Noise filter circuit The filter circuit is composed of L and C. It reduces common noises and normal mode noises generated from the AC line. The common noise means that generated in each line for GND. Its noise component is delivered through C002, C003, and C022 to GND. The normal noise means that overlapped in the AC line or the output line. It is attenuated by C023, C001, L002, C004, and L003. Refer to fig (2). (2) Rush current prevention circuit and rectifying/ smoothing circuit fig (3) Rush current prevention, rectifying/smoothing circuit fig (2) Noise filter circuit e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 11 e-STUDIO162_151.book 12 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時37分 Since the AC power is directly rectified, if there were not this rush current prevention resistor (TH001), an extremely large rush current would flow due to a charging current flowing through the smoothing capacitor C006 when turning on the power. To prevent against this, the rush current prevention resistor TH001 is provided between the rectifying diode D003 and the smoothing diode C006, suppressing a rush current. The rectifying/smoothing circuit rectifies a 60Hz AC voltage with the rectifying circuit, and smoothes it with the smoothing capacitor C006. Q001 VDS waveform (3) Inverter and control circuit (Ringing choke converter system) Q001 ID waveform ID Np Secondary output side D706 D113 ID waveform Nc Ns Fig. (5) Ringing choke converter operation waveforms When Q001 turns off, energy accumulated in the transformer (T001) flows a current of waveform C in the path indicated with dotted line as shown in the figure above through D101 and D113 and dissipates to the secondary output side. When this energy is exhausted, the current flowing through D101 and D113 turns off. However, the NS winding has a slight remaining energy, which generates a voltage in the base winding NC and turns on Q001 again to repeat switching operation, supplying a high frequency power to the secondary side. (4) Overcurrent protection circuit (Primary side) The ON period extension due to an increased output load is detected, and the OFF period of Q001 is extended by the control circuit, and energy accumulated in the primary winding of the transformer T001 is reduced, providing protection against an overcurrent. Refer to Fig. (4). (5) Rectifying/smoothing circuit (+5V) Fig. (4) Inverter and control circuit When the power is supplied to this circuit, the DC voltage, Vref, supplied by the rectifying/smoothing circuit is applied through R006 and R007 to FET (Q001), turning on Q001. When Q001 is turned on, the drain current, ID, flows as the waveform B in Fig. (5) to apply VDC to the main winding, NP, on the primary side. At the same time, a voltage is generated in NC winding and applied through R005 and C008b to the gate of Q001. As a result, Q001 is turned on rapidly. At the same time with this, C009 is charged through D001, R001, and D012. When the potential of C009 reaches 0.7V (= VBE of Q002), Q002 turns on to turn off Q001. fig (6) Rectifying/smoothing circuit The high frequency pulse generated by the inverter circuit is decreased by the converter transformer, rectified by the high frequency diode D113, and smoothed by C107 and C108. Voltage waveform Voltage waveform fig (7) +5V rectifying/smoothing circuit voltage waveform e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 12 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時7分 [14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1. MCU PWB A B C MCU PWB (CPU section) VCC3 When IC1 is, mounted R4(*3) OPEN 0J R3(*1) OPEN 680J 4 Spreading Range : +/- 1.25% C1 *6 NOT mounted R7(*4) 22J OPEN R2(*2) 0J OPEN C3(*5) 22pF 15pF C1(*6) 22pF 15pF R1 OPEN IC1 8 7 VDD 6 SR0 5 MODOUT SSon VCC3 C2 0.1u R2 1 Xin 2 Xout 3 FS0 4 Vss *2 R3 X1 HC-49U/S 19.6608MHz P2010/PLL701-01 R5 0J *1 R4 *3 R6 0J C3 *R2,R3,C1, and C3 are tentative *5 R7 *4 C4 SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 ESS_TS (8-A3) ES_CMD (8-A3) (8-A2) /ESS_RDY (8-A2) /ESC_RDY R8 R9 R10 33J 33J 100J ESS_TS ES_CMD /ESS_RDY /ESC_RDY /WDTOVF (4-C2) (4-C2) (4-C2) /PRINTST RD HWR LWR /STBY NMI /PRINTST /RD /HWR /LWR CPUCLK(NC) (2-E3) (13-B2) (3-A2) (2-C1) (3-A2) (4-A2) (2-C1) /RESET1 12p VCC3 (SIN1) (SIN2) (SIN3) (4-D4) (KEYIN) (13-B2) MSU_ST1 C386 OPEN (4-C3) ADFMT3 ADFMT2 ADFMT1 ADFMT0 PSL 5 6 7 8 /CS3 /CS2 /CS1 /CS0 BR110 4 3 2 1 /CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0# C383 OPEN 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 BR20 33J 8 7 6 5 PE PE P PE 1 R21 1 2 3 BR24 4 33J 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 33J RESETOUT1 R22 10kJ A (2-C4) C23 OPEN 1 2 3 4 /RESET0 C22 0.1u M51957BFP A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 NC NC IN VCC NC OUT GND Cd A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 R19 3.3kJ IC4 1 2 3 4 A0 A1 A2 A3 R18 11kF BR23 33J 8 7 6 5 C24 0.1u R20 10kF PD PD2 PD PD PE PE PE PE VCC3 1 2 3 4 VCC3 PD7 PD PD5 PD4 33J Reset IC VCC3 HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321) P35/ P34/ P33/ P32/ P31 P30/ C384 OPEN C381 22pF C382 OPEN 2 R337 33J /SCANSP /SCANST /TRANSST /SCANSP (2-D2) /SCANST (2-E3) /TRANSST (2-E3) PMCLK (5-B2) ADFMT3 (4-C2) (4-C3) ADFMT2/MIRCNT ADFMT1 (4-C3) ADFMT0 (4-C3) AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2 BR22 33J 8 7 6 5 (4-D4) (4-D4) (4-D4) 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 BR21 33J 8 7 6 5 RTH P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss 10kJ R13 /ES_PAGE (5-E3) PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 10kJ 10kJ R12 IC2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 (8-A2) R11 3 /ASIC_RST (2-D1) (8-A1) (9-B2) C25 47p B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 1 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時7分 C D E 1/14 VCC3 BR1 C5 100p BR4 1 2 3 4 /STBY NMI /WDTOVF C6 100p RY/BY /CS4# 1 2 3 4 /ESC_RDY /ESS_RDY ES_CMD ESS_TS 1 2 3 4 /PRINTST 8 7 6 5 RY/BY R331 33J /CS4# 10kJ BR6 BR7 8 7 6 5 D11 D10 D9 D8 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 D7 D6 D5 D4 1 2 3 4 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 BZR LCDDB5 LCDDB4 RY/BY /CS4 (4-C1) (4-C1) (4-C3) (4-C1) (4-C1) (3-B2) (13-B2) 8 7 6 5 ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC mt_at_home 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) A20 1 2 3 4 10kJ 10kJ BR10 10kJ 8 7 6 5 10kJ 1 2 3 4 D3 D2 D1 D0 8 7 6 5 BR9 BR2 8 7 6 5 4 10kJ BR8 10kJ 1 2 3 4 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 8 7 6 5 10kJ 8 7 6 5 CPUCLK(NC) RD HWR LWR 4 3 2 1 POFF TxD1 SDA SCL 4 3 2 1 /TRANSST /SCANST /SCANSP 1 2 3 4 10kJ BR11 5 6 7 8 10kJ BR12 5 6 7 8 10kJ C385 OPEN CPU3.3 (6-D4) (6-D4) (6-D4) (6-D4) 1 2 3 4 BR3 BR94 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 /CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3# 8 7 6 5 10kJ 10kJ DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 RESETOUT1 BR5 1 2 3 4 D15 D14 D13 D12 BR13 8 7 6 5 3 P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 ADFMT3 ADFMT2 ADFMT1 ADFMT0 4 3 2 1 (SIN1) (SIN2) (SIN3) (KEYIN) 4 3 2 1 LCDE (4-C1) LCDRS (4-C1) SCL SDA TXD1 POFF 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 8 BR14 7 33J 6 5 8 BR16 7 33J 6 5 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 1 2 3 4 8 BR19 7 33J 6 5 D3 D2 D1 D0 5 6 7 8 10kJ TxD1 (11-B2) POFF (5-B1) D15 D14 D13 D12 1 2 3 4 8 BR17 7 33J 6 5 BR15 BR18 5 6 7 8 10kJ D[15..0] (2-A1) (3-A1) (4-A2) (13-C2) 38 / Q P64/IRQ0 Q Vss 65 10kJ H8S/2321 2 Serial EE-PROM VCC3 ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC MT_HOME CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) A20 ARB_INT (2-B1) (4-D4) (8-A2) (FW) CPU_SYNC (2-B1) mt_at_home (14-C3) (2-A4) (14-D3) CCD_TG (7-E1) (SPPD) (7-E1) (PSW) VCC3 VCC3 C7 0.1u IC3 8 7 6 5 SCL SDA R15 1kJ R16 1kJ VCC E0 WC E1 SCL E2 SDA VSS R14 10kJ 1 2 3 4 R17 OPEN 24WC02 SCL (4-A1) SDA1 (4-B1) A[19..0] (2-A1) (3-A3) VCC3 L1 ZJSR5101-223 C 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C9 0.1u CPU3.3 D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 2 C8 + 1 10u/16V E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時7分 A B C MCU PWB (ASIC section) 33J R27 33J R29 33J R30 33J R31 33J AFE_SDI (14-A2) AFE_SEN C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 47p 8 7 6 5 VCC3 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 (6-B3) MM_PH_A MM_AI0 (6-B3) MM_AI1 (6-B3) MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 1 2 3 4 BR39 1 2 3 4 BR41 1 2 3 4 BR43 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 BR45 RAMDB3 1 RAMDB2 2 RAMDB1 3 4 RAMDB0 BR49 RAMDB15 1 2 RAMDB14 3 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 4 BR52 1 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 2 RAMDB9 3 4 RAMDB8 BR56 1 (3-E2) DQM1 2 (3-E2) SDCKE 3 4 BR60 1 MAD12 MAD11 2 3 MAD9 4 MAD8 BR62 MAD7 1 2 MAD6 3 MAD5 MAD4 4 BR63 RAM_CLK_OUT 8 7 6 5 MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 MAD10 (3-E3) RAMDB[15..0] BANK1 BANK0 /SDCS (3-D2) (3-D2) (3-D2) (3-D2) /SDRAS /SDCAS /SDWDE DQM0 RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 VCC3 BR48 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 BR53 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 RAMDB3 RAMDB2 RAMDB1 RAMDB0 BR57 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 BR61 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8 (3-E2) SDCLK 33J 8 7 6 5 33J 8 7 6 5 33J 33J 8 7 6 5 33J 8 7 6 5 33J 8 7 6 5 33J 8 7 6 5 82J 8 7 6 5 33J 8 7 6 5 33J R351 33J C397 0.1u VCC3 L3 X2 C66 22000p 8 VCC OUTPUT 5 1 1 N.C. GND SFCLK48 R43 33J C67 0.1u 4 ASIC HG73C138HFV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 ZJSR5101-223 C68 12p R44 PFCLKIN X3 (3-A3) (1-C1) A[19..0] A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 3 (1-D2) 0J 12p ARB_INT PFCLKOUT R45 C70 MEM_INT (13-C2)(4-A2) (3-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0] 0J A9 A8 A7 A6 HC-49U/S (16.1511MHz) (4-C3) MIRCNT (1-D2) CPU_SYNC 12p D3 D2 D1 D0 C69 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 OSC-31 48MHz D7 D6 D5 D4 2 (3-D2) (3-D2) (3-D2) GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8 PFCLKOUT PFC LKIN (3-E1) MAD[12..0] (6-B3) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 (6-B3) MM_BI1 (6-B3) 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 SFCLK48 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 10kJ 10kJ MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B1) (1-A2) /CS2 R33 R34 MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0 8 7 6 5 RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 3 10kJ 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 CL IC5 BR33 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 (14-A4) 1 2 3 4 CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 10kJ AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10kJ 10kJ AFE_SDI 1 2 3 4 BR29 1 2 3 4 BR31 R32 BR27 AFE_DB7 33J AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 BR30 AFE_DB3 33J AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 JTG _TMS JTG_TCK C48 47p JTG _TDO JTG_ TDI C47 BR9 4 3 2 1 CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) VCC3 JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO /OUTCS PFC LK CLKSW (14-A2) ADCLK (14-A2) AFE_SCK (14-A3) AFE_DB[7..0] BR2 4 3 2 1 /IN REQ /OU TCS /OU TACK /ESPRD /FA XPRO /PCLPRO (14-D3) CCD_PHI2 (14-D3) CCD_PHI1 /RESET0 (1-B1) (3-B2) (14-A2) AFE_SDI /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /OUTACK /INREQ MMD R26 (1-B3) /LWR (13-B2) (3-A2) (1-B3) /RD (8-A1) (1-B1) (/ASI C_RST) (9-B2) 4 33J (5 B1) (14-D3) CCD_CP 33J R25 SYNC# (14-A2) BSAMP 33J R24 VIDEO# /LEND (14-D3) CCD_RS R23 (4-C1) (5-B1) (14-A2) VSAMP (1-D2),(14-D3) CCD_TG C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時7分 C D E 2/14 VCC3 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u 10KJ 5 6 7 8 G3.3V 0.1 u BR93 4 3 2 1 VCC3 L2 ZJSR5101-102TA 0.1 u 10KJ 5 6 7 8 0.1 u BR25 4 3 2 1 C35 C34 C33 C32 C31 C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C36 + 47u/16V 4 0.1 u 0.1 u 0.1 u C64 C46 0.1 u 0.1 u C63 C45 0.1 u 0.1 u C62 C44 0.1 u 0.1 u C61 C43 0.1 u 0.1 u C60 C42 0.1 u 0.1 u C59 C41 0.1 u 0.1 u C58 C40 0.1 u C39 0.1 u C57 0.1 u C38 C37 /H_SYNC (8-A2) 0.1 u PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 0.1 u 1 2 3 4 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 C56 10KJ 8 7 6 5 BR26 33J 8 7 6 5 BR28 33J C55 1 2 3 4 R28 0.1 u PIDATA[7..0] (8-A4) VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 C65 G3.3V 8 7 6 5 BR32 33J 8 7 6 5 BR34 33J 1 2 3 4 /POREQ (8-A2) /PIW R /PIACK /POACK /PIREQ (8-A4) (8-A4) (8-A2) (8-A4) 3 PODATA[7..0] (8-A2) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC3 R35 10kJ R310 10J /PR_LINE (8-A2) R311 10J /SC_LINE (8-A2) /TRANSST (1-A2) /PRINTST (1-B3) /SCANST (1-A2) RCV VPIN VMIN 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 BR44 33J 8 7 6 5 BR47 33J 8 7 /REV 6 5 /FAULT BR51 33J /ACK 8 7 BUSY 6 PE SLCT 5 BR55 33J 8 /INIT 7 /SLCTIN /AUTOF D 6 5 /STB BR58 33J 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 /SCANSP (4-C3) OP_CLK (4-C3) PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 /REV /FAULT (12-A3) (12-A3) /ACK BUSY PE SLCT (12-A3) (12-A3) (12-A3) (12-A3) /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOF D /ST B (12-A3) (12-A3) (12-A3) (12-A3) VCC3 PARAD[7..0] (12-A3) VCC3 MEM_INT CLKSW /POREQ /PIREQ BR35 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 BR37 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 BR40 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 2 VCC3 VCC3 OP_LATCH (4-C3) OP_DATA (4-C3) TM (4-C2) TM_ (4-C2) R37 10kJ /IMC_READY (8-A2) KEYSC3 (4-C2) KEYSC2 (4-C2) KEYSC1 (4-C2) ADFON (4-C2) MIRON (4-C2) (5-B3) MPFS HL PR CPFS2 VCC3 PARAD0 PARAD1 R38 OPEN R39 OPEN BR46 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 BR50 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 BR54 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOF D /STB BR59 1 2 3 4 10kJ 8 7 6 5 RCV VPIN VMIN PFCLK R40 OPEN R41 10kJ R42 10kJ (5-B2) (5-B3) (5-B3) 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC) /POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B 1 2 3 4 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 VCC3 1 R352 33J (/ASIC_RST) R353 N.M. R358 10kJ /RESET1 R354 N.M. DEVDIR SPFS SRRC SGS SPUS RRS LDEN MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 CPFS1 (4-A1) (5-B3) (5-B2) (5-B2) (5-B2) (5-B2) (5-B3) VFMCNT VFM /FPOFF (5-B3) R46 SYNC# (/SYNC) (4-D4) 10J (5-B3) MMD PMD TC GRID L MC BIAS VIDEO# /LEND (4-C1) (5-B1) C (5-B1) (5-B1) (5-B4) (5-B4) (5-B4) (5-B4) /OA_RST (9-B2) R355 N.M. /FWREN C398 47p D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 4 C71 47p E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時7分 A B C MCU PWB (Memory section) 4 (1-C1) (2-A1) A[19..0] 3 10kJ 0J R47 R48 VCC3 V R49 10kJ IC7 IC8 5 28 12 CS1 OE WE 6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 HWRZ /RESET0 VCC3 VCC3 (1-D3) RY/BY VDD VDD GND GND A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 8 24 C73 C74 0.1u 0.1u 9 25 R51 0J A17 A1 IS63LV1024L-12J-TR OPEN CS1Z RDZ HWRZ I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 OPEN (1-A2) /CS1 /RD (15-B2) (2-C1) (1-B3) (1-B3) /HWR A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 R53 2 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32 R52 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 NC NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY NC A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 Flash ROM (15-C2) (4-A2) (2-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0] Flash ROM IC7 R51 LH28F400BVE-BL85 OPEN 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 5 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時8分 C D E 3/14 4 RAMDB[15..0] (2-A2) 3 VCC3 VCC3 IC6 VCC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 RAMDB0 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 R49 10kJ RAMDB3 RAMDB4 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 A17 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4 D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0 RDZ A1 RAMDB7 MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 DQM0 (2-A2) (2-A2) /SDWDE (2-A2) /SDCAS (2-A2) /SDRAS (2-A3) /SDCS (2-A3) BANK0 (2-A3) BANK1 VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8 DQM1 (2-A2) SDCLK (2-A2) SDCKE (2-A2) R50 0J MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4 C399 N.M. SDRAM (16bit x 4bank) 2 /CS0 (1-A2) VCC3 C75 0.1u C76 0.1u C77 0.1u C78 0.1u C79 0.1u C80 0.1u C81 0.1u C82 0.1u MAD[12..0] (2-A3) IC6 5 SDRAM LH28F800BJE-PBTL90 128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank) 0J Vendor/Type MT48LC8M16A2TG-75(Micron) HY57V281620HCT(Hyndai) K4S281632E-TC75(Samsung) W981216BH-75(Winbond) 1 64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank) C HY57V641620HGT-P Hyndai) MT48LC4M16A2TG-75 Micron) K4S641632F-TC75(Samsung) K4S641632E-TC1H(Samsung) W986416DH-7(Winbond) D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 6 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 7 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時8分 A B C MCU PWB (Driver section 1) Digital Input Multiplexer 5V 5V/3.3 IC9 (7-E2) (7-E4) (7-E3) (7-E1) (7-E3) (7-E4) (7-E3) (7-E1) (PPD1) (POD) (MFD) (CED1) (TCS) (PMRDY) DVS1 (DRST) 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 (10-E3)(4-E2) (10-E3)(4-E2) (10-E3)(4-E2) (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) 11 10 9 7 4 VCC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 16 R56 Y W A B C G GND 5 (10-C4) KEYIN SIN1 SIN2 SIN3 SPFS SRRC SGS SPUS SIN1 (4-C4) 10J 6 C83 C84 0.1u 33p 8 74HC151 5V IC11 11 10 9 7 VCC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 16 VCC3 R57 Y W A B C G GND 5 R55 10kJ SIN2 (4-C4) 10J 6 C87 C88 0.1u 33p (2-D2) OP_CLK (2-D2) OP_DATA (2-D2) OP_LATCH PSL (1-A2) 8 FW BZR (1-D3) /ASIC_RST R317 74HC151 47pF 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 (PPD2) (PPD3) THOPEN (CED2) DSWS (MMLD) (7-E2) (7-E4) (5-E2) (7-E1) (7-C4) (7-E3) 5V 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 (SDSW) (SPID) (SB4D) (SDOD) (PD1) (PD2) (7-E4) (7-E4) (7-E4) (11-D3) (7-E4) (7-E4) 11 10 9 7 VCC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 A B C G 10kJ 3 R59 10kJ 16 C389 5V IC13 R60 Y W GND 5 SIN3 (4-C4) 10J 6 C90 C91 0.1u 33p 8 MIRCNT (4-C3) 74HC151 ADFMT0 (1-A2) ADFMT1 (1-A2) (1-A2) ADFMT2/MIRCNT ADFMT3 (1-A2) MIRON (2-D1) ADFON (2-D1) 4 3 2 1 Extension Digital Output Port BR68 10kJ (15-C2) (3-A1) (2-A1) (1-D2) D[15..0] IC15 VCC3 C93 5 0.1u (1-A2) /CS3 IC17 1 11 1 10 4 2 3 (3-A2) (1-B3) /HWR 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 VCC3 2 5 6 7 8 VCC3 NC7S32M5X VCC Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 CLK OC GND SFTMT0 SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3 (6-D3) (6-D3) (6-D3) (6-D3) (1-B3) (1-B3) (1-B3) (2-D1) (2-D1) (2-D1) (2-D2) (2-D2) MCNT C94 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 TM TM_ R344 33J R346 33J R 33 0.1u 74LCX574 VCC3 EN5V R336 10kJ IC18 OE GND 5 5V 2 (SDA1) (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) (1-D3) 3 TC7SBD385AFU C103 0.1u 1 LCDDB7 LCDDB6 LCDDB5 LCDDB4 LCDE LCDRS /RESET0 R348 0J R350 0J /RESET# R308 10kJ EN5V 3.3V 3.3V R347 0J R349 0J R309 10kJ OPEN 4 DEVDIR B C394 (2-C1) A OPEN Vcc 1 C393 3.3V SDA1 5V IC20 1 4 (1-E2) SCL EN5V (SCL1) (11-D3) 2 NC7ST08M5X C109 0.1u For CRUM Model Only A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 7 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時8分 C D E 4/14 5V VCC3 VCC3 3.3V 5V/3.3V R54 10kJ IC10 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 (KEYIN) (1-A3) (SIN1) (SIN2) (SIN3) SPFS# SRRC# SGS# SPUS# IC45 Vcc 1 (11-B2) /SYNC 3 A1 Y1 A2 Y2 5 6 (/SYNC) (2-E1) 4 C379 4 C85 0.1u GND 47p 2 NC7WZ17 C86 0.1u 74LCX244 C3 VCC3 3.3V 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 R58 47pF R315 IC12 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND 8 7 6 5 (OP_CLK) (OP_DATA) (OP_LATCH) (PSL) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E4) (FW) (BZR) (10-E3) (/ASIC_RST) C89 C388 0.1u OPEN 5V 10kJ C389 33J R342 100J 74LCX244 10kJ 3.3V BR88 1 2 3 4 20 VCC 18 1Y1 16 1Y2 14 1Y3 12 1Y4 9 2Y1 7 2Y2 5 2Y3 3 2Y4 3 IC107 (2-C1) VCC3 3.3V 1 4 VIDEO# R61 2 100J /VIDEO (11-A2) NC7ST08M5X 3.3V 5V IC14 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 C380 0.1u (ADFMT0) (6-B1) (ADFMT1) (6-B1) (ADFMT2) (6-B1) (ADFMT3) (6-B1) 4 3 2 1 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 C92 0.1u BR67 10kJ 5 6 7 8 74LCX244 5V 3.3V 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 2 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) (KEYSC1) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC3) (TM) (TM_) (4-A4) (10-E3) (4-A4) (10-E3) (4-A4) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (6-D2) (6-D2) (LCDDB7) (LCDDB6) (LCDDB5) (LCDDB4) (LCDE) (LCDRS) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) (10-E3) 0.1u 33pF 33pF 33pF R345 33J 5V IC16 C95 C392 C391 C390 74VHCT244 VCC3 3.3V R323 R324 /RESET# /RESET1 OPEN 1 0.01uF C104 C396 C395 C394 C393 74LCX244 C 1kJ 33J C378 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 C377 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 0.1u OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN IC19 D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 8 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 9 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時8分 A B C MC UP WB( Dr i v ers ec t i o n2 ) 24V 4 BR107 1 2 3 4 (2-C1) MC (2-C1) BIAS (2-C1) TC (2-C1) GRIDL MCNT CPFS2 1.5kJ 8 7 6 5 IC21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R325 1.5kJ R343 1.5kJ 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 /MC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MCNT (10-B4) (10-A4) (10-B4) (10-A4) /CPFS2 KID65001AF PGND 24V (2-D1) (2-D1) (2-C1) BR108 1 2 3 4 CPFS1 MPFS RRS 1 2 3 4 (2-C1) VFM (2-C1) VFMCNT (2-D1) PR 3 BR109 1.5kJ 8 7 6 5 IC23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 7 6 5 1.5kJ 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 /CPFS1 /MPFS /RRS (11 /VFMCNT (11 /PR (10 KID65001AF PGND 24V IC25 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 SPFS# SPUS# SGS# SRRC# I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC 17 18 GND GND O1 O2 O3 O4 COM COM 2 /SPFS (11-E1) 7 /SPUS (11-E1) 9 /SGS 16 /SRRC (11-E1) IC26 (11-E1) (1-A2) (2-C1) (2-D1) (2-D1) (2-C1) (2-D1) (5-E3) 1 8 PMCLK MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 LDEN HL FTH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 PMCLK_A MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /LDEN (11(6-A (6-A (6-A (11- KID65503F TD62064AF PGND 2 For ADF/RADF Model Only IC27 (2-C1) (2-A3) (2-A3) (2-C1) (1-D3) (2-C1) (2-C1) MMD MM_Y1 MM_Y2 MM_Y3 POFF PMD /LEND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 /MMD (11-A4) MMref0 (6-A3) MMref1 (6-A3) MMref2 (6-A3) /POFF (10-B4) /PMD (11-B2) KID65503F 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 9 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 10 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時8分 C D E 5/14 4 /MC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MCNT (10-B4) (10-A4) (10-B4) (10-A4) /CPFS2 VCC3 R67 1MF VCC3 R68 7.5kF R69 1kJ 8 R66 1kF 12V 3 + D1 IC22A KIA393F 1 FTH (5-B2) 2 R70 10kF R71 4.3kF 12V 4 MA700 C110 0.1u 24V R73 /CPFS1 /MPFS /RRS (11-B3) VCC3 VCC3 47kJ D3 D2 R78 Q1 KTA1505S /VFMCNT (11-A3) 4.7kJ /PR (10-A3) 1/4W 1 1 12V 3 3 2 VFMOUT 2 KDS226 8 (11-A3) D40 3 + (11-C1) RTH_IN 1SS355 KDS226 IC24A KIA358F R81 300J 3 R82 100J 1 RTH (1-A3) 2 4 C111 22000p PGND C112 12V 0.1u C113 0.1u INT5V VCC3 12V 5V D4 R83 1.2kF R84 10kJ 8 1 Q2 KRA119S 1SS355 (11-B2) (6-A1) (6-A1) (6-A1) (11-B2) 5 + 2 7 THOPEN (4-A4) 6 - 3 R85 10kF R86 240J 4 PMCLK_A MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /LDEN IC22B KIA393F C114 22000p R87 240J HLOUT (10-B3) 2 8 12V 5 + IC24B KIA358F 7 4 6 - 5V R88 10kJ Q3 KRC106S 3 SHOLD (11-B2) 2 1 /MMD (11-A4) MMref0 (6-A3) MMref1 (6-A3) MMref2 (6-A3) /POFF (10-B4) /PMD (11-B2) 1 C D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 10 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 11 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時10分 A B C MCU PWB (Driver section 3) 4 Scanner Motor Driver (10-D2) OUT_A(10-D2) OUT_A+ (10-D2) OUT_B+ (10-D2) OUT_B- 24VM 5V R89 R90 0.68J 1W PGND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C116 820p MM_BI0 (2-A3) MM_BI1 (2-A3) (2-A3) MM_PH_B 5V R93 1kJ R97 1kJ R98 510J 24 OUT 1A VS 23 OUT 2A SENSE 1 22 SENSE 2 COMP 1 21 OUT 1B 20 COMP 2 I01 19 OUT 2B GND 18 GND GND 17 GND I11 16 I02 PHASE 1 15 I12 VREF 1 14 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 1 13 RC 2 VSS MM_AI0 R95 30kJ R94 30kJ C119 0.1u 5V PGND 0.68J 1W C115 820p (2-A3) PGND MM_AI1 (2-A3) MM_PH_A (2-A3) L6219DS or AMM56219 C117 820p R96 2kJ R91 1.5kJ IC29 R92 1.5kJ C118 820p PGND PGND PGND 3 C121 0.1u (5-C1) MMref0 (5-C1) MMref1 (5-C1) MMref2 CP2 0603FA1.5A 24VM PGND C123 0.1u/50V PGND 0. ADF Motor Driver C125 2200p R99 7.5kJ R100 7.5kJ C126 2200p 2 C127 OPEN PGND 5V R101 1kJ C130 24VM OPEN R102 750J R103 1J 2W IC31 23 20 25 3 24 19 12 18 C132 R107 300J R108 620J R109 1.2kJ R110 100J R104 2.4kJ 2200p R111 2.4kJ C135 C134 26 27 17 16 0.1u (5-C2) (5-C2) (5-C2) 2200p MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 PGND R114 1J 2W PGND R115 1kJ CrA CrB VsA RsA VrefA VrefB RsB VsB In /A In A In /B In B Vmm OUT /A OUT A OUT /B OUT B 22 1 4 14 11 SPMT_2 SPMT_0 SPMT_3 SPMT_1 (11(11(11(11- 15 PG 28 PG C136 OPEN MTD1361/F PGND C137 OPEN PGND (4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D3) (4-D3) (ADFMT2) (ADFMT0) (ADFMT3) (ADFMT1) 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 11 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 12 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時10分 C D E 6/14 Duplex Motor Driver 4 IC28 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 (1-D3) DMT0 (1-D3) DMT1 (1-D3) DMT2 (1-D3) DMT3 17 18 O1 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND O2 2 /DMT0 (11-B3) 7 /DMT1 (11-B3) 9 O3 /DMT2 (11-B3) 16 O4 /DMT3 (11-B3) 24VDup COM COM D5 1 8 TD62064AF MTZ J22B PGND Shifter Motor Driver 24V IC30 CP1 0603FA1.5A (4-B2) SFTMT0 24VSFT (4-B2) SFTMT1 CP3 0603FA1.5A 5A (4-B2) SFTMT2 24VDup V C124 0.1u/50V + C122 47u/35V (4-B2) SFTMT3 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 R338 0J R339 0J R340 0J R341 0J 17 18 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND 2 O1 7 O2 9 O3 16 O4 /SFTMT0 (11-A1) /SFTMT1 (11-A1) /SFTMT3 (11-A1) 24VSFT D6 1 8 COM COM TD62064AF PGND 3 /SFTMT2 (11-A1) MTZ J22B PGND Toner Motor Driver 24V 2 C128 10u/35V + C129 0.1u/50V PGND IC32 _2 _0 _3 _1 (11-E1) (11-D1) (11-D1) (11-E1) R105 1kJ (4-D3) (TM) (4-D3) (TM_) R112 47kJ R113 47kJ R106 1kJ PGND 19 20 18 21 1 2 3 4 7 10 11 12 13 Vcc PSAVE VM OUT1 Rin OUT2 Fin VREF RNF NC GND FIN NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 17 16 9 5 TMB_O (11-A1) TMA_O (11-A1) 6 8 FIN 25 24 23 22 15 14 BA6920FP PGND 1 C D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 12 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 13 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時11分 A B C MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) 4 VCC3 5V C138 C139 C140 C141 C142 C143 C144 C145 C146 0.1u OPEN 0.1u 0.1u OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN D11 1 3 2 KDS226 C147 C148 C149 C150 C151 C152 C153 C154 C155 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN C156 C157 C158 C159 C160 C161 C162 C163 C164 OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN 0.1u 0.1u OPEN OPEN OPEN C174 C175 C176 C177 C178 C179 C180 C181 C182 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u OPEN R132 20kJ D12 1SS355 DSWS (4-A3) R134 2.7kJ R133 20kJ C165 0.1u INT24V R135 24V1(DSWS) (9-A3) 0.22J 2W PGND 24V C183 + 47u/35V PGND D20 1SS355 INT24V C184 R145 100J 2W 0.1u/50V PGND C189 IC33 1 + IN OUT 2 3 D17 1SS355 3 KIA7805 47u/35V 2 L5 ZJSR5101-223 INT5V GND R136 1kJ 2W C190 0.1u L6 ZJSR5101-223 (10-A4) 12VIN 12V C191 + 47u/25V (10-B4) 3.3VIN C193 VCC3 C192 0.1u + C194 0.1u 22u/16V 5V C195 22u/16V + EN5V C197 C196 0.1u 22u/16V + C198 0.1u 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 13 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 14 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時11分 C D E 7/14 5V 1 D7 3 2 1 D8 KDS226 1 3 2 D9 KDS226 1 3 2 D10 KDS226 4 3 2 R116 10kJ R117 10kJ R118 10kJ R119 4.7kJ R120 10kJ R121 10kJ R122 39kJ R123 10kJ KDS226 (11-D1) SDSW (11-E1) SPID (11-E1) SB4D (11-D2) PPD3 (11-B1) PD1 (11-D2) PD2 (11-C2) POD (11-A2)PMRDY R124 R125 R126 R127 R128 R129 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ R130 R131 1kJ 1kJ (SDSW) (SPID) (SB4D) (PPD3) (PD1) (PD2) (4-A3) (11-E1) (4-A3) (4-A4) (4-A3) (4-A3) (4-A4) (POD) (PMRDY) (4-A4) 5V 1 D14 3 2 1 D15 KDS226 1 3 2 D16 1 3 2 KDS226 KDS226 D13 3 2 C166 C167 C168 C169 C170 C171 C172 C173 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p KDS226 3 5V 1 D18 3 2 1 D19 3 2 KDS226 R137 10kJ KDS226 R138 10kJ R139 39kJ R140 10kJ R141 R142 R143 R144 (11-C3) DVSEL (11-C3) TCS (11-C1) MFD (11-A4) MMLD 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ DVS1 (TCS) (MFD) (MMLD) (4-A4) (4-A4) (4-A4) (4-A3) 5V D21 1 D22 3 2 1 3 2 KDS226 C185 C186 C187 C188 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p KDS226 2 5V VCC3 D23 1 D24 3 2 1 KDS226 D25 3 2 KDS226 1 2 3 KDS226 1 R146 39kJ R147 39kJ R148 7.5kJ R149 7.5kJ R150 7.5kJ D26 3 2 R151 10kJ R152 3.3kJ KDS226 (11-C2) PPD1 (11-C1) PPD2 (11-D1) SPPD (10-E4) PSW (11-B4) CED1 (11-D2) CED2 (10-E4) DRST 5V R153 R154 R155 R156 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ R157 R158 R159 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ (PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW) (4-A4) (4-A4) (1-D2) (1-D2) (CED1) (4-A4) (CED2) (4-A3) (DRST) (4-A4) VCC3 1 2 D27 3 KDS226 1 2 D28 3 C199 C200 C201 C202 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1 2 KDS226 D29 3 C203 C204 1000p 1000p KDS226 1 C D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 14 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 15 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時11分 A B C MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) IC37 (2-D3) (2-D4) 119 120 124 125 126 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 135 137 138 141 142 /PIWR (2-D3) /PIACK (2-D3) /PIREQ PIDATA[7..0] PIDATA7 PIDATA6 PIDATA5 PIDATA4 PIDATA3 PIDATA2 PIDATA1 PIDATA0 4 OA_RX OA_TX RY_BY 168 169 170 (8-C1) CLK_EXT (13-C3) PB_NCS1 BR74 1 2 3 4 BR75 1 2 3 4 (9-B3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0] 8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 33JX4 7 6 5 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 3 (9-A2) PB_NCS3 (9-A2) (13-C3) PB_NAE0 (9-B3) (13-C4) (9-B2) (13-C3) PB_NWE (9-B2) (13-C3) PB_NOE BR77 PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 BR78 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR[7:0] (1-B3) (1-B3) 8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 33JX4 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 MODEM_IN USBVBUS 2 C267 NC /FPOFF R320 10kJ (2-E3) (9-B2) (2-E3) /SC_LINE INT_USBD /PR_LINE /FPOFF (2-D4) /H_SYNC (2-D3) (2-D3) /POREQ /POACK PODATA7 PODATA6 PODATA5 PODATA4 PODATA3 PODATA2 PODATA1 PODATA0 10KJ (2-E3) 24 26 28 29 30 31 32 34 (2-D2) /IMC_READY (13-C3) MDM_IRQ (9-D3) SUSPEND R232 199 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 15 16 19 21 22 23 /ES_PAGE /ESC_RDY /ESS_RDY WAKEUP R231 7.5kF 178 180 181 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 194 195 196 197 198 1 2 8 9 11 12 13 14 ES_CMD ESS_TS (1-D2) (FW) (9-B2) DT_ACKB (9-B2) DT_REQB (1-A3) (1-B3) (1-B3) (9-D3) 143 145 146 147 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 165 166 167 /FPOFF 1 2 3 4 BR36 1 2 3 4 BR38 8 7 6 5 8 33J 7 6 5 33J PODATA[7..0] 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 175 176 PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 PI_TR_TGEN PI_TGEN6 PI_TGEN5 PI_TGEN4 PI_TGEN3 PI_TGEN2 PI_TGEN1 PI_TGEN0 PI_DATA7 PI_DATA6 PI_DATA5 PI_DATA4 PI_DATA3 PI_DATA2 PI_DATA1 PI_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX PP_NINIT PP_NFAULT PP_NSELECTIN PP_NAUTOFD PP_SELECT PP_PERROR PP_BUSY PP_NACK PP_DATA7 PP_DATA6 PP_DATA5 PP_DATA4 PP_DATA3 PP_DATA2 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK PP_DATA0 PP_NSTROBE BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 REG_A8/PB_NCS2 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1 REG_RDY/PB_NWE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 10KJ TDO 10KJ TCK 10KJ TMS 10KJ TDI 10KJ TRST_L (1-B1) (2-C1) (9-B2) /OA_RST R233 R234 TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L OPEN OPEN R235 R236 4.7KJ 4.7KJ VCC3 1 C300 15P X4 32.3022MHz R237 TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L 112 113 114 116 117 118 172 177 5 4 0J XIN XOUT SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_CS1B_L ROM_CS_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_CKE PLLCS_VDDA PLLCS_VSSA PLLSS_VDDA GP_B0/USART0_TX GP_B1/USART0_RX GP_B2/USART0_CK GP_B3/ANA_SD1 GP_B4/DT_ACKB GP_B5/DT_REQB GP_B6/DT_ACKA GP_B7/DT_REQA PLLSS_VSSA GP_D0/ADC_A0 GP_D1/ADC_A1 GP_D2/ADC_A2 GP_D3/ADC_CLK GP_D4/ADC_DATA GP_D5/ADC_NCS GP_A0 GP_A1 GP_A2/DC_CHY1 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 GP_A4/DC_PWM1 GP_A5/DC_CHY0 GP_A6/DC_CHX0 GP_A7/DC_PWM0 PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS PO_REQ/ANA_SD0 PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 PO_DATA2/PLOAD PO_DATA1/PCLK PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C USB_DM USB_DP VCC3 R244 R243 R242 R241 R240 SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 RESET_L TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L TEST_MODE0 TEST_MODE1 VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE XIN XOUT SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 BR69 1 2 3 4 BR70 1 2 3 4 BR71 1 2 3 4 BR72 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 109 107 106 105 SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 BR73 1 2 3 4 8 33JX4 7 6 5 _SDRAM_DQMA _SDRAM_DQMB _SDRAM_DQMA _SDRAM_DQMB 104 102 77 75 SDRAM_CS0_L R218 33J _SDRAM_CS0_ R332 33J R333 R334 R335 33J 33J 33J 111 110 101 BR111 1 2 3 4 BR112 1 2 3 4 BR113 1 2 3 4 BR114 1 2 3 4 100 99 97 96 95 94 92 91 90 89 85 82 80 84 83 79 78 SDRAM_CKE 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 R356 S SDR SDR 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 33J R225 R226 OA3.3V 7 6 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA1 150JX4 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA1 C259 0.01U C260 1U C262 0.01U C263 1U C400 N.M. 149 148 3 20 25 33 46 59 71 81 93 103 115 130 144 158 171 184 200 18 36 70 88 122 140 174 192 10 27 41 54 64 76 86 98 108 123 136 150 164 179 193 206 OA3.3V OA3.3V C273 0.1U C274 0.1U C275 0.1U C276 0.1U C277 0.1U C278 0.1U C283 0.1U C284 0.1U C285 0.1U C286 0.1U C287 0.1U C288 0.1U C292 0.1U C293 0.1U C294 0.1U C295 0.1U C296 0.1U C297 0.1U 17 35 69 87 121 139 173 191 OA-982 (8-A3) CLK_EXT C306 15P A 74 73 72 68 67 66 65 63 62 61 60 58 57 56 55 53 B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 15 CLK_EXT C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 16 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時12分 C D E 8/14 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-D4) (8-E4) (8-E3) M_DATA0 _DATA1 _DATA2 _DATA3 _DATA4 _DATA5 _DATA6 _DATA7 _DATA8 _DATA9 _DATA10 _DATA11 _DATA12 _DATA13 _DATA14 _DATA15 (8-C3) (8-D3) (8-D2) (8-E4) SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] (8-C3) (8-D2) _DQMA0 _DQMB0 _DQMA1 _DQMB1 (8-C4) (8-E4) (8-E3) M_CS0_L _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] ROM_CS_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] (8-E4) (8-D3) (8-D4) _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E3) IC38 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK[1:0] SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMB1 R330 0J VCC3 _SDRAM_DATA8 R327 0J _SDRAM_DATA9 R328 0J 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 16 9 10 R329 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMA0 ROM_CS_L 11 28 26 10kJ RY_BY 15 47 14 12 /RESET0 IO0 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 IO9 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15/A-1 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 4 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] (8-C3) (8-D3) (8-D4) VCC3 R217 SDRAM_ADDR0 0J VCCW WE OE CE VCC 13 VCC3 37 RY/BY C256 NM C257 0.1U BYTE WP/ACC RESET GND GND 46 27 Flash ROM Flash ROM Model SDRAM_BANK[1:0] (8-D4) (8-D2) (8-D1) _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CKE 33J 4.7KJ 5 6 _SDRAM_CLK (8-D2) Vendor/Type E-Sort Model 4Mbit LH28F400BVE-BL85 R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN FAX Model (US) 8Mbit LH28F800BJE-PBTL90 R327/R328/R330 ; OPEN FAX Model (except US) 16Mbit LH28F160BJE-BTL90 R327/R328/R330 ; 0J 3 IC39 (8-C3) (8-E4) (8-D4) (8-C3) (8-D4) SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] SDRAM_BANK[1:0] (8-C3) _SDRAM_CLK OA3.3V VCC3 L10 ZJSR5101-102TA C278 0.1U C279 0.1U C280 0.1U C281 0.1U + SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21 _SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L 19 16 17 18 _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CKE 38 37 _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 15 39 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1 DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15 CS WE CAS RAS VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ CLK CKE LDQM UDQM C401 N.M. VDD VDD VDD VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ C272 47U/16V 40 VSS VSS VSS N.C 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 49 43 9 3 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] (8-C4) (8-D4) (8-E4) _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3 27 14 1 52 46 12 6 54 41 28 VCC3 C268 0.1U C269 0.1U C270 0.1U C271 0.1U C332 0.1U C333 0.1U C334 0.1U 2 K4S561632D C288 0.1U C289 0.1U C290 0.1U VCC3 C297 0.1U C298 0.1U _SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 C299 0.1U BR115 1 2 3 4 BR116 1 2 3 4 BR117 1 2 3 4 BR118 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 10kJX4 _SDRAM_CS0_L 10kJX4 _SDRAM_CKE C264 NM C265 47p 10kJX4 10kJX4 1 T R238 4.7KJ C D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 16 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 17 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時12分 A B C MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) 4 VCC3 C314 0.01U C315 0.01U C316 0.01U C317 0.01U C318 0.01U C319 0.01U VCC3 VCC3 GND C323 0.1U C324 0.1U C325 0.1U C326 0.1U C327 0.1U C328 0.1U C320 + 10U/16V GND VCC3 (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_ADDR[7:0] C338 0.1U GND C339 0.1U PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 VCC3 IC42 (8-A3) PB_NCS3 (8-A3) (13-C3) PB_NAE0 40 41 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 10 (2-D1) /OA_RST 1 4 2 NC7S08M5X GND 2 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 (8-A2) INT_USBD (8-A2) DT_REQB (8-A2) DT_ACKB (13-C3) (8-A3) PB_NOE (13-C3) (8-A3) PB_NWE 25 28 12 13 26 27 PB_NOE PB_NWE 11 29 VCC3 IC43 2 R303 100P 1 VCC(3.3) 24 VCC(3.3) 58 / IN RE DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 WAK SUSP XT XT Vreg /RESET /CS INT DREQ DACK /RD /WR EOT ALE ISP1581 4 D D MO MO BUS_C AGND DGND (8-A3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0] AD0 AD1 AD2 AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 R 3 23 30 31 32 33 34 35 38 39 DGND DGND DGND DGND PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 VCC(5.0) VCC(5.0) VCC(5.0) VCC(5.0) IC41 (8-A3) (9-B3) (13-C4) PB_DATA[7:0] 1 36 42 61 3 2 37 43 64 GND R304 0J NC7S04M5X R305 NM GND GND GND L12 GND 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 17 AG AGN MLF1608-J AG GND C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 18 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時12分 C D E 9/14 4 C321 0.1U + C322 10U/16V 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ NC 10KJ R281 R282 R284 R287 AG R280 VCC3 GND 17 18 16 22 21 62 63 /CS1 /CS0 INTRQ READY DA2 WAKEUP SUSPEND 3 PB_NOE PB_NWE 14 15 20 9 19 DIOR DIOW MODE0 MODE1 BUS_CONF R283 R285 10KJ 10KJ R286 R288 10KJ NC WAKEUP (8-A2) SUSPEND (8-A2) R289 10KJ C329 60 XTAL1 59 XTAL2 Y1 10P GND 12MHz C330 4 Vreg(3.3) R293 1.5KJ R290 10KJ GND GND (8-A2) USBVBUS L14 10P BLM21PG600SN1 GND CN33 1 +5V 2 -D 3 +D 4 GND 5 SHIELD 7 RPU 5 6 DD+ L15 DLW21SN900SQ2 8 RREF 12KF 2 UBR23(ACON) R301 NM USB2.0 DEV1 R302 C331 0.01U L16 BLM21PG600SN1 FG AG AGND_UD2 FGND_UD2 AGND_UD2 L13 GND C MLF1608-J FG FGND_UD1 1 D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 18 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 19 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時12分 A B C MCU PWB (Connector section 1) To Power unit 4 INT5V INT24V CN1 C208 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 /TC /MC (5-C4) (5-C4) 3.3VIN (7-B2) /POFF 24V (5-C1) (7-A2) HLOUT (5-D2) B24B-PHDSS-B 0.1u/50V 2 C207 0.1u/50V 1 EN5V 5V 12VIN FW /PR 1 (7-A2) (4-C4) (5-C3) /BIAS /GRIDL 2 (5-C4) (5-C4) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 PGND PGND 3 2 1 A B e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 19 C 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 20 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時12分 C D E 10/14 To Operational PWB 4 EN5V 5V VCC3 5V CN2 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 D30 1 1 R160 10kJ 3 2 KDS226 DRST PSW 2 1000p 1 1000p 1 2 1000p C211 2 (PSL) (OP_CLK) (OP_LATCH) (OP_DATA) (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) (LCDDB7) (LCDDB6) (LCDDB5) (LCDDB4) (LCDE) (LCDRS) (BZR) (KEYSC1) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC3) C210 2 C205 1000p 1 KEYIN 1kJ 2 C209 2 (4-C4) 1 1 R162 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 28FE-BT-VK-N 3 To Mirror motor 2 CN4 (6-A4) (6-A4) (6-A4) (6-A4) OUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_AOUT_B- 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 B4B-PH-K-R 1 C D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 20 E 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 21 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時13分 A B MCU PWB (Connector section 3) 4 To Mech. COUNTER 24V CN8 3 2 1 /MCNT B3B-PH-K-S 3 To Cover open detect 5V 5V D37 1 3 2 KDS226 R177 4.7kJ R318 150J 1/4W R178 1kJ CN14 3 2 1 (4-A3) (SDOD) C221 B3B-PH-K-S 1000p (White) For ADF/RADF Model Only 2 A e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 21 B 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 22 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時13分 C D 11/14 To 2nd. cassette 4 24V 5V 1000p 1000p PD2 CED2 C228 PPD3 (7-C4) (7-C1) C227 (7-C4) 1000p /CPFS2 C226 CN18 (5-C3) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 B14B-PHDSS-B PGND 3 2 C e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 22 D e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 23 1 2 3 4 /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /FAULT (2-D2) /REV /OA_RST (2-D2) /STB (2-D2) /AUTOFD (2-D2) /SLCTIN (2-D2) /INIT (2-D2) (2-D2) (2-D2) (2-D2) (2-D2) (2-E2) PARAD[7..0] VCC3 EN5V A R319 0J PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /FAULT /STB /AUTOFD /SLCTIN /INIT R326 /REV OPEN /REV CN39 10kJ To NIC PWB 24FMN-BTK-A 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0.1u B C243 0.1u VCC3 10kJ C242 R198 10 15 1 48 19 24 20 21 22 23 /STB /AUTOFD /SLCTIN /INIT 17 16 14 13 12 11 9 8 7 18 GND GND PLH HLHin C14 C15 C16 C17 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 Vcc-cable Vcc-cable 74LVX161284 GND GND HD DIR PLHin HLH A14 A15 A16 A17 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Vcc Vcc IC34 IEEE1284 Driver/Receiver 2 3 4 5 6 R197 3.3V B /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /FAULT PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 VCC3 MCU PWB (IEEE1284Interface section) A 34 39 30 25 29 28 27 26 47 46 45 44 43 32 33 35 36 37 38 40 41 31 42 0.1u EN5V 10kJ 0.1u C245 EN5V C244 R200 5V C C 100p 330p 100p 100p C246 C247 C248 C249 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p 100p C229 C230 C231 C232 C233 C234 C235 C236 R209 BR92 1 2 3 4 R204 BR91 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BR90 1 2 3 4 BR89 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 10kJ 22J 22J 22J 22J 8 7 6 5 8 22J 7 6 5 D D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 F.G /D STB Data 0 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /AUTO FD NC SG FG PLHOUT CN28 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 IEEE1284_CN D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND D-GND /INIT /FAULT D-GND NC HLHIN /SLCT IN IEEE1284 Connector Shield E R196 E 3.3KJ 11EQS06 D39 EN5V 12/14 1 2 3 4 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 23 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時13分 1 2 3 A (4-A3) MODEM_IN (1-B3) (2-C1) (3-A2) /RD (1-D3) /CS4 MSU_ST1 (1-A3) (2-D1) (9-B2) (8-A3) 2 1 4 NC7S32M5X IC46 MDM_IRQ B (1-D2) (2-A1) (3-A1) (4-A2) D[15..0] MSU_ST1 R306 10kJ VCC3 /FWREN PB_NWE VCC3 R357 N.M. (8-A2) PB_NOE /OA_RST MDM_IRQ (2-D1) PB_NCS1 PB_NAE0 (9-B2) (8-A3) PB_ADDR[7:0] (8-A3) (9-A2) (8-A3) (8-A3) (9-B3) (8-A3) (9-B3) (9-B3) PB_DATA[7:0] 5 3 4 MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 C402 PGND 24V EN5V VCC3 0.1u VCC3 PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 20FE-BT-VK-N 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN38 26FE-BT-VK-N 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN37 C C To Modem PWB To Modem PWB D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MSU_ST1 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 MDM_IRQ C368 OPEN B D D C372 OPEN C359 OPEN C360 OPEN C361 OPEN C365 OPEN C364 OPEN C374 OPEN A C366 OPEN C375 OPEN C362 OPEN C363 OPEN C371 OPEN C369 OPEN C370 OPEN e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 24 C373 OPEN C367 OPEN C376 OPEN E 13/14 E 1 2 3 4 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 24 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時13分 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 25 1 2 3 4 (2-A4) CL A R169 15kJ C216 33p R170 56kJ C213 47u/35V + 24V R166 10kJ B PGND Q5 KTC3198 R168 5.6kJ 1/4W Q4 KTB1151 Y D33 11EQS06 B TWKA-221K L9 220uH Copy Lamp Inverter MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) A 47u/35V + C214 0.1u/50V C215 R167 15kJ CP4 0603FA1.5A VCL C (1-D2) mt_at_home C R165 1kJ 1000p C212 R164 10kJ VCC3 2 1 3 KDS226 D32 (2-A4) (2-A4) (2-A4) (2-A4) (2-A4) (1-D2) (2-A4) D AFE_DB[7..0] AFE_SCK ADCLK CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 CCD_CP CCD_RS CCD_TG D VCL AFE_DB0 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB6 PGND 12V 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 FF4-32-S15D5 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 CN3 To Scanner unit PGND EN5V E VCL VSAMP AFE_SDI BSAMP AFE_SEN AFE_DB5 AFE_DB7 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB3 14/14 E 1 2 3 4 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 25 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時13分 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 26 1 2 3 OP-LATCH OP-DATA OP-CLK A Open C308 1 2 KRC106S Q302 R324 0J 1 3 2 3 R323 10KJ 3.3V R325 0J 1 Q304 KRA225S 3 Q303 KRA225S 1 4 5V R303 3 B R326 0J Q305 KRA225S 2 2 OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD Section) R304 100J R302 0.1u C322 3.3V 100J 100J 6 5 1CAS 2CAS LED305 ALM SPON LED306 LED307 SCAN FAX LED308 LED302 LED301 COPY LED304 C /OUT0 16 VCC 7 /OUT1 1000p 1000p open C305 C306 C307 2 S-IN 8 /OUT2 4 CLOCK 3 B 9 /OUT3 /LATCH 10 /OUT4 13 /ENABLE 11 /OUT5 R305 0J R327 820J R306 OPEN 14 S-OUT 12 /OUT6 15 /OUT7 GND R-EXT TB62725AF IC304 READY LED310 MB LED309 PRINT LED303 C =(1.15/820)x14.9=20.9mA Iout=(1.15/Rext)x14.9 [A] open C323 1 A DATA1 LED_V3 LCDDB[7..4] LED_V2 LED_V1 LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 D PSL LCDE D R333 2 LCDRS KRC106S Q301 100J R328 10kJ R332 R331 R330 R329 R334 1 LCDE# LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7# LCDRS# 3 LCDDB7# LCDDB6# LCDDB5# LCDDB4# LCDE# LCDRS# 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 560J R335 3.3V R301 470J 1/3 Pin Holes x 10 GPM181C0 GND V5 VDD RS R/W E DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 IC301 PML E LED311 0.1u E To LCD 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C333 5VEN C332 100p C327 100p C328 100p C329 100p C330 100p C331 100p 1 2 3 4 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 26 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時14分 2. OPERATION PWB e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 27 1 2 3 4 2 KRC106S 47pF C315 A Open Open Open C311 C310 C309 KEYIN Open Open Open C318 C319 C320 SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 BZR Q306 R317 R316 R315 R318 R338 R337 R336 1 3 0.1u PSW 5V 0.1u C312 C321 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 33J 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ R339 2 5V 10kJ PS1720P02 1 BZ301 5 6 6 4 5 1 2 3 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Open C304 74HC151 Y W IC302 A B C G D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 74HC238 G1 G2A G2B A B C IC303 5VEN 11 10 9 7 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 PSW KEY310 OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer Section) A B B R314 R313 R312 R311 R307 R308 R309 R310 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 1SS133 D303 1SS133 D302 1SS133 D301 R342 2kJ C337 Open C335 Open C 2kJ R341 F-KEYIN1 NM5K NM3K F-KEYSC1 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC3 KEY319 NM2K KEY323 NM6K KEY320 KEY324 CLK KEY325 CAK KEY321 C Open C334 2kJ R340 F-KEYIN2 NM9K KEY317 NM4K KEY318 NM1K KEY322 Open C313 2kJ R319 F-KEYIN3 NM0K KEY308 SHPK KEY309 NM8K KEY316 Open C314 2kJ R320 F-KEYIN4 ASTK KEY307 NM7K KEY315 MAGK KEY306 D D Open C316 2kJ R321 F-KEYIN5 EXMODK KEY305 UPK KEY313 ENTK KEY314 Open C317 2kJ R322 F-KEYIN6 ESTK KEY304 MENUK KEY311 DWK KEY312 Open C336 2kJ R343 F-KEYIN7 DUPK KEY303 CASK KEY302 MODK KEY301 E E F-KEYIN8 2/3 1 2 3 4 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 27 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時14分 LCDE LCDRS BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 B LCDDB[7..4] 0.1u C325 47uF/16v C301 0.1u C326 Close to CN1 C 18FE-ST-VK-N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CN301 To FAX Key PWB F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 F-KEYIN8 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D DRST S3B-PH-K-S 1 2 3 CN303 To Drum Initial Detector E E 3/3 3 4 1 LCDDB7 LCDDB6 LCDDB5 LCDDB4 PSW KEYIN PSL OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 47uF/16v C302 5VEN D 1 A 0.1u 47uF/16v DRST C324 C303 5V C 2 28FE-ST-VK-N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 CN302 3.3V To MCU PWB B 2 3 4 OPERATION PWB (Connector Section) A 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 28 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時14分 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 28 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 29 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時14分 3. POWER SUPPLY 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 POWER SUPPLY (120V/127V) A B C D E F G H 1 2 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 29 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 30 ページ 6 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時14分 7 8 9 10 11 12 1/1 A B C D E F G H 6 7 8 9 10 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 30 11 12 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 31 ページ 1 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時16分 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 POWER SUPPLY (220V/240V) A B C D E F G H 1 2 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 31 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 32 ページ 6 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時16分 7 8 9 10 11 12 1/1 A B C D E F G H 6 7 8 9 10 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 32 11 12 e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 33 PD1 CED1 MM MPFS PD1 D-GND PPD1 CED1 D-GND CPFS1 1 2 1 2 OPTIONAL (FAX) BR GY BR GY DSW RD RD CN15 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) 1 2 3 4 5 CN26 24V /MPFS LEDMFD MFD D-GND CN25 PD1 D-GND 1 2 PK GY CN7 CED1 D-GND PK PL GY 1 2 CN16 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND BR GY BL PK PL GY RD CN10 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 CN12 24V /RRS 1 2 BL PK PL GY RD RRS 1 2 3 4 5 PMCLK-A PMRDY /PMD P-GND 24V TM 1 2 5 6 7 8 PM PK GY OR GY PL PK GY LB CN23 TMA-O TMB-O 24V 24V /MM MMLD GND GND Shifter Motor LSU 6 1 3 2 5 4 8 7 5V1(DSWS) D-GND /VIDEO S/H D-GND /LDEN /H SYNC D-GND 1 2 CN19 LEDPOD POD D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 CN13 24V /DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3 1 3 4 CN6 INT24V INT24V /MM MMLD P-GND P-GND PK LB GY CN11 VFM /VFMCNT P-GND 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 4 3 2 1 PL GY PK BL GY PL GY CN27 24V /SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 1 2 PK BL GY 1 2 3 4 5 OR GY PL PK GY LB PK GY RTH AN-GND 1 2 1 2 3 CN20 INT5V D-GND /VIDEO SHOLD D-GND /LDEN NC /SYNC D-GND D-GND P-GND PMCLK-A PMRDY /PMD P-GND 24V H S Y N C LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND 1 2 3 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 POD Duplex Motor VFM RTH PPD2 PK BL GY CN22 LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND RTH-IN AN-GND MCU PWB 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CN1(2/2) D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND 1 3 5 7 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 CN1(1/2) INT5V INT24V /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC CN5 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND CN3 (AFE_DB0) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB4) D-GND (AFE_DB6) (AFE_DB5) MHPS (AFE_DB7) (AFE_SCK) D-GND (ADCLK) (AFE_SEN) CCD_PHI1 D-GND CCD_PHI2 (AFE_SDI) CCD-CP (BSAMP) CCD-RS D-GND CCD-TG (VSAMP) D-GND EN5V 12V 12V VCL VCL P-GND P-GND CN4 OUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_AOUT_B- CN2 D-GND KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 BZR LCDRS LCDE LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 OP-DATA OP-LATCH OP-CLK PSL KEYIN PSW DRST D-GND 5VEN D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND GY GY GY BL OR BL OR BR PL RD PK RD PK PL GY GY OR RD YE BR LB PK RD PL BR GY RD GY GY GY BL OR BL OR BR PL RD PK RD PK PL GY GY OR RD YE BR LB PK RD GY CN1 D-GND KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 BZR LCDRS LCDE LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 OP-DATA OP-LATCH OP-CLK PSL KEYIN PSW DRST D-GND 5VEN D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND 1 2 5 6 7 8 CN101 D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND CN10 BIAS F-GND CN6 INT5V INT24V /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC CN1 (AFE_DB0) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB4) D-GND (AFE_DB6) (AFE_DB5) MHPS (AFE_DB7) (AFE_SCK) D-GND (ADCLK) (AFE_SEN) CCD_PHI1 D-GND CCD_PHI2 (AFE_SDI) CCD-CP (BSAMP) CCD-RS D-GND CCD-TG (VSAMP) D-GND EN5V 12V 12V VCL VCL P-GND P-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Scanner Motor 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MC 1 2 BC TC BR GY POWER SUPPLY PWB RD WH WH RD RD CN001 L N CN001 CN002 HLL HLN L N 1 2 1 4 2 3 DRST D-GND POWER SUPPLY PWB CN002 HLL HLN CARRIAGE UN HVT PWB CN9 1 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CN11 GRID MCFB CCD PWB VCL P-GND OP PWB CN2 D-GND D-GND F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 F-KEYIN8 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D-GND CN3 DRST D-GND CN1 D-GND D-GND F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 F-KEYIN8 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D-GND BK WH 1 2 6 5 8 1 2 1 2 120V ONLY HLL HLN 1 2 6 5 8 INLET 200V EX ONLY HLL HLN 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS YE GR BK WH BK WH INVERTER PWB 1 2 BK BK 1 2 CL CL WH TCS HL DV un HL THERMOSTAT WH THERMOSTAT WH WH WH WH FAX OP PWB OPTIONAL (FAX) 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DRST 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 33 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時16分 4. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM (1) MCU SECTION (1/3) PWB MCU CN24 D-GND 3 6 SDSW 5 SPID 7 SB4B 8 5V 24V 11 12 /SPUS 1 D-GND 2 SPPD LEDSPPD 4 SPMT-1 19 SPMT-3 20 SPMT-2 21 SPMT-0 22 24Vmir 23 24Vmir 24 24V 13 /SPFS 14 24V 15 /SRRC 16 24V 17 /SGS 18 OR OR RD BR GY BR PK PL PK BL BR RD RD RD PK RD PL RD BL e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 34 RD BL RD PL RD PK RD BR GY PL BL GY PL BL 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 24V /SGS 24V /SRRC 24V /SPFS 24V /SPUS D-GND SDSW SPID SB4B 5V 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 OR GY PL BL R-ADF UNIT PL PK BL BR RD RD GY BR PK 5 4 3 2 1 3 1 6 4 2 5 SPMT PWB SENSOR SGS (R-ADF only) SRRC SPFS SPMT-1 SPMT-3 SPMT-2 SPMT-0 24Vmir 24Vmir SPPD SPUS D-GND SDSW SPID SB4B 5V 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 34 ページ 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午前8時56分 (2) RADF/ADF SECTION (Optional) (2/3) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 35 Personal Computer(USB PORT) Personal Computer (IEEE1284 port) CN16 D-GND DIR3 /IT3 /SELIN3 /AFEED3 /STB /FLT SLCT PERR PBSY /PACK P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0 /RESET VCC3 5V 5V D-GND CN33 5V USB DATA DATA + D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 PWB MCU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CN37 D-GND MDM_IRQ (/FAX_RST) PB_MOE PB_NWE PB_NAE0 PB_NCS1 D-GND PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 D-GND PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 D-GND CN38 D-GND MSU_ST1 /CS4 /RD MODEM_IN D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P-GND 24V D-GND EN5V VCC3 VCC3 D-GND 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN1 D-GND MSU_ST1 /CS4 /RD MODEM_IN D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P-GND 24V D-GND EN5V VCC3 VCC3 D-GND CN2 D-GND MDM_IRQ (/FAX_RST) PB_MOE PB_NWE PB_NAE0 PB_NCS1 D-GND PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 D-GND PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 D-GND PWB FAX CN10 VOUT1 VOUT2 1 2 OPTIONAL TO TEL SPEAKER 14_CIRCUTDIAGRAM.fm 35 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後7時16分 (3) I/F & FAX (Optional) SECTION (3/3) e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 [15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 2) Select "Option" → "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar. [Preparation] Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit. A USB port is required for the PC. Create "MaintenanceTool " flooder in the PC, and copy the following files to the folder. Necessary for program download • • • • • • Maintenance.exe (← Tool program) ProcModelB.mdl ProcModelC.mdl ProcModelE.fmt ProcModelE.ini ProcModelE.mdl 3) Set the serial number according to the following. Driver • Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000) • Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE) • Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE) Download file • Download file (extension .dwl) Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in which the maintenance program is included. When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do not put a long folder name in the absolute path. [Example] Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool 1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading. Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again when rebooting the program. Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading firmware only. 1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "e-STUDIO162/151 series" in the "Select Model" menu. (Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.) Product Code (P): Enter number (0 – 99) Enter the product code of “3.” ID Code(I): Enter number (0 – 99) Assign an individual code to each PC uses “Maintenance.exe.” After completion setting, press [OK] key. 4) The serial number has been assigned. 2. Download procedures 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to the USB port on the main unit without fail. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "e-STUDIO162/151 series" in the Select Model menu. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 1 e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. 8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used. 9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is performed automatically. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.) 10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed. 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download DWL Data Area" in the sub trees. Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this moment. 11) Main unit side: Wait until "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. When "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed, download is completed. Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB cable. 12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON the machine again. Download is completed with the above procedures. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 2 e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable again and select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above procedures from 5). ∗ Inhibition during download (Important) 4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use great care not to execute the following items during download. • Never turn off the machine. • Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable). * If the above inhibition item occurs during downloading, turn OFF/ON the power. 1) When "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel, execute the download procedure again. 2) If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed on the operation panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) and turn ON the power. Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel, and execute the download procedure again. If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed, replace the MCU with a new one. 3. Version acquisition procedures 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "e-STUDIO162/151 series" in the "Select Model" menu. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/IMC2/ Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5). e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 3 e-STUDIO162_151.book 4 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in the sub trees. 8) Check that the following display is shown. With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed. • The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as shown in “MCU Boot Version” and “MCU program Version”. 4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure 4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program. 5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the display, select "File" → "Reconnect" on the menu bar. 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/IMC2/ Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5). EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data maintenance of EEPROM. 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "e-STUDIO162/151 series" in the "Select Model" menu. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 4 e-STUDIO162_151.book 5 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area" in the sub trees. 5. Installing procedures <USB integration maintenance program installation> Driver installation is made on plug-and-play. <Installation on Windows XP> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown. Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next> button. 8) PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save." 4) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 7). 9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is displayed. With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed. Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are saved in a file with extension of .eep. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 5 e-STUDIO162_151.book 6 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\ 2kXp folder.) 6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button. 8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the integration maintenance program is completed. <Installation on Windows 2000> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and press <Next> button. 7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway] button. 4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press <Next> button. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 6 e-STUDIO162_151.book 7 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button. 6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 9). 7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button. 8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.) 9) Press <Next> button to start installation. 10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button. 11) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the integration maintenance program is completed. e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 7 e-STUDIO162_151.book 8 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 <Installation on Windows Me> 1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. (Press and hold [CA] key and [DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. 3) The following display is shown on the PC side. Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button. 6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next> button. 7) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button. 4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and press <Next> button. If the search location does not include the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf). (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.) 8) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the integration maintenance program is completed. 5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.) e-STUDIO162/162D/151/151D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 8 memo.fm 1 ページ Memo 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午前9時50分 memo.fm 2 ページ Memo 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午前9時50分 memo.fm 3 ページ Memo 2004年12月3日 金曜日 午前9時50分 e-STUDIO162_151.book 1 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 LEAD-FREE SOLDER The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder. Example: <Solder composition code of lead-free solder> Lead-Free 5mm Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.) a Solder composition Solder composition code Sn-Ag-Cu a Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu b Sn-Zn-Bi z Sn-In-Ag-Bi i Sn-Cu-Ni n Sn-Ag-Sb s Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag p (1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable. (2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220°C, which is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after completion of soldering work. If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer. e-STUDIO162_151.book 2 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT (Danish) ADVARSEL ! Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution ! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen. CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL (For USA, CANADA) "BATTERY DISPOSAL" THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY (MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS. "TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES" CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE) QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET DE TRAITEMENT. e-STUDIO162_151.book 3 ページ 2004年12月2日 木曜日 午後9時48分 Trademark acknowledgements • Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. • Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000, and Windows® XP are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. • IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. • Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners. 2-17-2, HIGASHIGOTANDA, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8664, JAPAN